Aa80e Eng

PARK / NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH REMOVAL
1. DISCONNECT FLOOR SHIFT GEAR SHIFTING ROD SUB-ASSEMBLY

a. Remove the nut and disconnect the floor shift gear shifting rod.
2. REMOVE PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSEMBLY

a. Disconnect the switch connector.
b. Remove the nut, spring washer and transmission control shaft
lever.
c. Using a screwdriver, pry off the lock washer.
d. Remove the lock nut and lock washer.
e. Remove the bolt and park/neutral position switch.

Tech Tips
Make sure that the manual valve lever shaft has not been rotated prior to
installing the park/neutral position switch as the detent spring may become
detached from the manual valve lever shaft.
PARK / NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ADJUSTMENT
1. ADJUST PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSEMBLY

a. Loosen the bolt of the park/neutral position switch and move the
shift lever to the N position.
b. Align the groove with the neutral basic line.
c. Hold the switch in position and tighten the bolt.
Torque:
13 N*m { 133 kgf*cm, 10 ft.*lbf }
d. After adjustment, perform the on-vehicle inspection Click here.
PARK / NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH INSPECTION
1. INSPECT PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSEMBLY

a. Measure the resistance of the switch when the shift lever is moved
to each position.
Standard resistance
Tester Connection Shift Lever Position Specified Condition

6 (PL) - 2 (RB) P Below 1 Ω
6 (PL) - 2 (RB) Not on P 10 kΩ or higher
1 (RL) - 2 (RB) R Below 1 Ω
1 (RL) - 2 (RB) Not on R 10 kΩ or higher
9 (NL) - 2 (RB) N Below 1 Ω
9 (NL) - 2 (RB) Not on N 10 kΩ or higher
7 (DL) - 2 (RB) D Below 1 Ω
7 (DL) - 2 (RB) Not on D 10 kΩ or higher
PARK / NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSEMBLY
Tech Tips
Make sure that the manual valve lever shaft has not been rotated prior to installing the park/neutral position switch as the detent spring may
become detached from the manual valve lever shaft.
a. Install the switch to the manual valve shaft.
b. Temporarily install the bolt.
c. Install a new lock washer with the nut.
Torque:
6.9 N*m { 70 kgf*cm, 61 in.*lbf }
d. Temporarily install the transmission control shaft lever RH.
e. Turn the control shaft lever counterclockwise until it stops, and
then turn it clockwise 2 notches to set it to the N position.
f. Remove the control shaft lever.
g. Align the groove with the neutral basic line.

h. Hold the switch in this position and tighten the bolt.
Torque:
13 N*m { 133 kgf*cm, 10 ft.*lbf }
i. Using a screwdriver, bend the tabs of the lock washer.
Tech Tips
Bend at least 2 washer tabs.
j. Install the transmission control shaft lever with the spring washer
and nut.
Torque:
16 N*m { 163 kgf*cm, 12 ft.*lbf } Text in Illustration
k. Connect the switch connector.
*a Neutral Basic Line
*b Groove
2. CONNECT FLOOR SHIFT GEAR SHIFTING ROD SUB-ASSEMBLY

a. Temporarily connect the shifting rod to the connecting rod swivel with the nut.
Tech Tips
The nut will be tightened to a torque specification during the shift lever position adjustment procedure.
3. ADJUST SHIFT LEVER POSITION
Click here
Click here
TRANSMISSION WIRE COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
TRANSMISSION WIRE INSPECTION
1. INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE (ATF TEMPERATURE SENSOR)

a. Measure the resistance of the transmission wire.
Standard resistance
Tester Connection ATF Temperature Specified Condition

8 (OIL) - 9 (E2) 10°C (50°F) 5.8 to 7.1 kΩ
8 (OIL) - 9 (E2) 25°C (77°F) 2.5 to 4.5 kΩ
8 (OIL) - 9 (E2) 110°C (230°F) 231 to 263 Ω
Tech Tips
If the resistance is not within the specified range of any of the ATF
temperatures shown in the table above, the driveability of the vehicle may
decrease.
TRANSMISSION WIRE REMOVAL
1. REMOVE COWL TOP VENTILATOR LOUVER

a. for LHD:
Remove the 6 clips and cowl top ventilator louver RH.
b. for RHD:
Remove the 6 clips and cowl top ventilator louver LH.
2. DISCONNECT CABLE FROM NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL
CAUTION:
Wait at least 90 seconds after disconnecting the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal to prevent airbag and seat belt pretensioner
activation.
Note
After turning the engine switch off, waiting time may be required before disconnecting the cable from the battery terminal. Therefore, make sure
to read the disconnecting the cable from the battery terminal notice before proceeding with work Click here.
3. DRAIN AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID
a. Remove the drain plug and gasket, and drain the ATF.
b. Install a new gasket and the drain plug.
Torque:
20 N*m { 204 kgf*cm, 15 ft.*lbf }
4. REMOVE NO. 1 EXHAUST PIPE SUPPORT BRACKET SUB-ASSEMBLY
a. Remove the 4 bolts, 2nuts and No. 1 exhaust pipe support bracket
sub-assembly.
Tech Tips
Turn the nut labeled A while holding the bolt.
5. REMOVE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OIL PAN SUB-ASSEMBLY

a. Remove the 9 bolts, oil pan and gasket from the transmission.
Note
Some fluid will remain in the oil pan. Remove all the pan bolts, and
carefully remove the oil pan assembly.
b. Remove the 3 transmission oil cleaner magnets from the oil pan.
c. Examine the particles in the pan.

i. Collect any steel chips with the removed magnets. Carefully
look at the foreign objects and particles in the pan and on
the magnets to guess the type of wear which might be
found in the transmission.
Steel (magnetic): bearing, gear and clutch plate wear
Brass (non-magnetic): bush wear
6. REMOVE VALVE BODY OIL STRAINER ASSEMBLY

a. Remove the 4 bolts and oil strainer from the valve body.
b. Remove the O-ring from the oil strainer.
7. REMOVE TRANSMISSION VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY

a. Remove the bolt, lock plate and ATF temperature sensor.
b. Remove the O-ring from the ATF temperature sensor.
c. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector.
d. Disconnect the 8 connectors from the solenoid valves.
e. Remove the bolt, detent spring cover and detent spring.

f. Remove the 17 bolts and valve body.
Note
Do not drop the check ball body and spring.
g. Disconnect the lever pin from the manual valve.
h. Remove the check ball body and spring.
8. REMOVE TRANSMISSION WIRE

a. Disconnect the 3 speed sensor connectors.
b. Disconnect the wire connector.

Tech Tips
Detach the claw, press down the lever, and then disconnect the
transmission wire connector.
c. Remove the bolt and pull out the transmission wire.

d. Remove the O-ring from the transmission wire connector.
TRANSMISSION WIRE INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL TRANSMISSION WIRE

a. Coat a new O-ring with ATF and install it to the transmission wire
connector.
b. Install the transmission wire.
c. Install the bolt.
Torque:
5.4 N*m { 55 kgf*cm, 48 in.*lbf }
d. Connect the wire connector.

Tech Tips
Push up the lever until the claw of the transmission wire connector makes
a connection sound.
e. Connect the 3 speed sensor connectors.
2. INSTALL TRANSMISSION VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY

a. Install the spring and check ball body.
b. Align the groove of the manual valve with the lever pin.
c. Install the 17 bolts.
Torque:
11 N*m { 112 kgf*cm, 8 ft.*lbf }
Tech Tips
Each bolt length is indicated below.
Bolt length
21 mm (0.83 in.) for bolt A
31 mm (1.22 in.) for bolt B
64 mm (2.52 in.) for bolt C
d. Install the detent spring and detent spring cover with the bolt.
Note
Make sure to install the detent spring so that its roller is perpendicularly at
the center of the manual valve lever.
Torque:
10 N*m { 102 kgf*cm, 7 ft.*lbf }
e. Connect the 8 connectors to the solenoid valves.

f. Connect the oil pressure switch connector.
g. Coat a new O-ring with ATF and install it to the ATF temperature
sensor.
h. Install the ATF temperature sensor and lock plate with the bolt.
Torque:
10 N*m { 102 kgf*cm, 7 ft.*lbf }
3. INSTALL VALVE BODY OIL STRAINER ASSEMBLY

a. Coat a new O-ring with ATF and install it to the oil strainer.
Note
Ensure that the O-ring is not twisted or pinched.
b. Install the oil strainer to the valve body with the 4 bolts.
Torque:
11 N*m { 112 kgf*cm, 8 ft.*lbf }
4. INSTALL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OIL PAN SUB-ASSEMBLY

a. Install the 3 magnets to the oil pan.
b. Install a new gasket and the oil pan to the transmission case with
the 9 bolts.
Torque:
7.3 N*m { 74 kgf*cm, 64 in.*lbf }
Note
Make sure that there is no oil or foreign matter on the gasket seal
surface and oil pan contact surface.
Install the gasket so that there is no slack in the gasket, and that the
seal surface's entire circumference is level.
Make sure that the 9 gasket drop prevention protrusions are set on
the oil pan.
When tightening the oil pan, make sure that the gasket is not
pinched between the gasket tightening area's sleeve and the
transmission's seal surface.
5. INSTALL NO. 1 EXHAUST PIPE SUPPORT BRACKET SUB-ASSEMBLY

a. Install the No. 1 exhaust pipe support bracket sub-assembly with
the 4bolts and 2 new nuts.
Tech Tips
Torque:
for Nut A
39 N*m { 398 kgf*cm, 29 ft.*lbf }
for Bolt B
43 N*m { 438 kgf*cm, 32 ft.*lbf }
6. CONNECT CABLE TO NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL
7. INSTALL COWL TOP VENTILATOR LOUVER

a. for LHD:
Install the 6 clips and cowl top ventilator louver RH.
Note
If the cowl top ventilator louver RH is not properly installed, water may leak
into the engine room and cause malfunctions. Therefore, make sure the
cowl top ventilator louver RH is installed properly.
b. for RHD:
Install the 6 clips and cowl top ventilator louver LH.
Note
If the cowl top ventilator louver LH is not properly installed, water may leak
cowl top ventilator louver LH is installed properly.
8. ADD AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID

a. Add automatic transmission fluid Click here.
9. PERFORM INITIALIZATION
a. Perform initialization Click here.
Note
Certain systems need to be initialized after disconnecting and reconnecting the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal.

connector.
Torque:
5.4 N*m { 55 kgf*cm, 48 in.*lbf }

Tech Tips
a connection sound.

Torque:
11 N*m { 112 kgf*cm, 8 ft.*lbf }
Tech Tips
Bolt length
Note
Torque:
10 N*m { 102 kgf*cm, 7 ft.*lbf }

sensor.
Torque:
10 N*m { 102 kgf*cm, 7 ft.*lbf }

Note
Torque:
11 N*m { 112 kgf*cm, 8 ft.*lbf }

the 9 bolts.
Torque:
7.3 N*m { 74 kgf*cm, 64 in.*lbf }
Note
the oil pan.

Tech Tips
Torque:
for Nut A
39 N*m { 398 kgf*cm, 29 ft.*lbf }
for Bolt B
43 N*m { 438 kgf*cm, 32 ft.*lbf }

a. for LHD:
Note
b. for RHD:
Note

Note

connector.
Torque:
5.4 N*m { 55 kgf*cm, 48 in.*lbf }

Tech Tips
a connection sound.

Torque:
11 N*m { 112 kgf*cm, 8 ft.*lbf }
Tech Tips
Bolt length
Note
Torque:
10 N*m { 102 kgf*cm, 7 ft.*lbf }

sensor.
Torque:
10 N*m { 102 kgf*cm, 7 ft.*lbf }

Note
Torque:
11 N*m { 112 kgf*cm, 8 ft.*lbf }

the 9 bolts.
Torque:
7.3 N*m { 74 kgf*cm, 64 in.*lbf }
Note
the oil pan.

Tech Tips
Torque:
for Nut A
39 N*m { 398 kgf*cm, 29 ft.*lbf }
for Bolt B
43 N*m { 438 kgf*cm, 32 ft.*lbf }

a. for LHD:
Note
b. for RHD:
Note

Note
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING
Tech Tips
The TCM of this system is connected to the CAN communication system. Therefore, before starting troubleshooting, make sure to check that
there is no trouble in the CAN communication system.
*: Use the intelligent tester.
1. VEHICLE BROUGHT TO WORKSHOP
NEXT
2. CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS

a. Refer to How to Troubleshoot ECU Controlled Systems in the Introduction section Click here.
NEXT
3. INSPECT BATTERY VOLTAGE
Standard voltage
11 to 14 V
If the voltage is below 11 V, recharge or replace the battery before proceeding.
NEXT
4. CONNECT INTELLIGENT TESTER TO DLC3*
NEXT
5. CHECK AND CLEAR DTCS AND FREEZE FRAME DATA*

a. Refer to DTC Check / Clear Click here.
NEXT
6. VISUAL INSPECTION
NEXT
7. SETTING CHECK MODE DIAGNOSIS*

a. Refer to Check Mode Procedure Click here.
NEXT
8. PROBLEM SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION

a. Refer to Road Test Click here.
Result
Result Proceed to
Symptom does not occur A
Symptom occurs B
B GO TO STEP 10
9. SYMPTOM SIMULATION
a. Refer to Electronic Circuit Inspection Procedure Click here.
NEXT
10. DTC CHECK*

Result
Result Proceed to
DTC is not output A
DTC is output B
B GO TO STEP 18
11. BASIC INSPECTION

a. Refer to Park/Neutral Position Switch Click here.
b. Refer to Floor Shift Assembly Click here.
NG GO TO STEP 21
OK
12. MECHANICAL SYSTEM TESTS

a. Refer to Mechanical System Tests Click here.
NG GO TO STEP 17
OK
13. HYDRAULIC TEST

a. Refer to Hydraulic Test Click here.
NG GO TO STEP 17
OK
14. MANUAL SHIFTING TEST

a. Refer to Manual Shifting Test Click here.
NG GO TO STEP 16
OK
15. PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE CHAPTER 1

a. Refer to Problem Symptoms Table Click here.
NG GO TO STEP 19
OK

NEXT
17. PART INSPECTION
NG GO TO STEP 21
OK
18. DTC CHART

a. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code Chart Click here.
NEXT
19. CIRCUIT INSPECTION
NEXT
20. IDENTIFICATION OF PROBLEM
NEXT
21. REPAIR OR REPLACE
NEXT
22. CONFIRMATION TEST
NEXT
END
Tech Tips
NEXT

NEXT
Standard voltage
11 to 14 V
NEXT
NEXT

NEXT
NEXT

NEXT

Result
Result Proceed to
Symptom occurs B
B GO TO STEP 10
NEXT
10. DTC CHECK*

Result
Result Proceed to
DTC is not output A
DTC is output B
B GO TO STEP 18

NG GO TO STEP 21
OK

NG GO TO STEP 17
OK
13. HYDRAULIC TEST

NG GO TO STEP 17
OK

NG GO TO STEP 16
OK

NG GO TO STEP 19
OK

NEXT
17. PART INSPECTION
NG GO TO STEP 21
OK
18. DTC CHART

NEXT
NEXT
NEXT
NEXT
NEXT
END
Tech Tips
NEXT

NEXT
Standard voltage
11 to 14 V
NEXT
NEXT

NEXT
NEXT

NEXT

Result
Result Proceed to
Symptom occurs B
B GO TO STEP 10
NEXT
10. DTC CHECK*

Result
Result Proceed to
DTC is not output A
DTC is output B
B GO TO STEP 18

NG GO TO STEP 21
OK

NG GO TO STEP 17
OK
13. HYDRAULIC TEST

NG GO TO STEP 17
OK

NG GO TO STEP 16
OK

NG GO TO STEP 19
OK

NEXT
17. PART INSPECTION
NG GO TO STEP 21
OK
18. DTC CHART

NEXT
NEXT
NEXT
NEXT
NEXT
END
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM ROAD TEST

a. Based on the result of the customer problem analysis, try to reproduce the symptoms. If the problem is that the
transmission does not shift up or down, or that the shift point is too high or too low, conduct the following road test
referring to the automatic shift schedule and attempt to duplicate the problem symptoms.
2. ROAD TEST
a. Perform a road test.
CAUTION:
Check for safety before performing any tests.
Note
Be sure to inspect and adjust the engine before performing these tests.
Perform the road test with the engine coolant temperature between 60 and 100°C (140 and 212°F) and the ATF temperature
between 50 and 100°C (122 and 212°F).
Perform these tests with the air conditioning and cruise control off.
Inspection Procedure
Transmission With the vehicle stationary and the shift lever in D, move the shift lever to M*1 or S*2 and return it to D. Check that
Control Switch
Test the meter display changes from D to the appropriate M*1 or S*2 range and then back again.
M Position Drive the vehicle with the shift lever in M, and move the shift lever to "+" and "-". Check that the meter display
Test*1 changes between M ranges properly.
S Position With the vehicle stationary and the shift lever in S, move the shift lever to "+" and "-". Check that the meter display
Test*2 changes between S ranges properly.
D Position Shift While driving the vehicle normally, check that the transmission shifts up and down through each gear properly.
Test
Lock-up Function While driving on a level surface at a constant speed in the lock-up range (32 km/h (20 mph) or more) with the shift
lever in D, lightly depress the accelerator pedal and check that the engine speed does not change abruptly.
P Position Test Stop the vehicle on an incline (approximately 5° or more). Then move the shift lever to P and release the parking
brake. Check that the parking lock pawl holds the vehicle in place.
Abnormal Noise Check for abnormal noise and vibration while driving the vehicle forward and backward, and during shift operations.
and Vibration
Fluid Leakage After performing all other road test inspections, check for fluid leakage.
*1: w/ Shift Paddle Switch

*2: w/o Shift Paddle Switch
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM MECHANICAL SYSTEM TESTS
1. STALL SPEED TEST
Tech Tips
This test is to check the overall performance of the engine and transmission.
Note
Do not perform the stall speed test longer than 5 seconds.
To ensure safety, perform this test in an open and level area that provides good traction.
The stall speed test should always be performed with at least 2 people. One person should observe the condition of the wheels and wheel
chocks while the other is performing the test.
a. Connect the intelligent tester to the DLC3.
b. Run the vehicle until the transmission fluid temperature has reached 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F).
c. Allow the engine to idle with the air conditioning and headlight OFF.
d. Chock all 4 wheels.
e. Set the parking brake and keep the brake pedal depressed firmly with your left foot.
f. Move the shift lever to the D position.
g. Depress the accelerator pedal as much as possible with your right foot.
h. Read the engine rpm (stall speed) and release the accelerator pedal immediately.
Evaluation:
Test Result Possible Cause
Stator one-way clutch is not operating properly

Stall speed is lower than standard value Torque converter is faulty (stall speed is less than standard value by 600 rpm or more)
Engine power may be insufficient
Line pressure is low

Stall speed is higher than standard value Forward multiple clutch (C1) slipping
No. 1 one-way clutch (F1) is not operating properly
Note
Perform the test at the normal operating ATF temperature of 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F).
SHIFT TIME LAG TEST
Tech Tips
This test is to check the condition of the direct clutch, forward clutch, 1st brake and reverse brake.
b. Run the vehicle until the transmission fluid temperature has reached 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F).
c. Allow the engine to idle with the air conditioning OFF.
d. Set the parking brake and keep the brake pedal depressed firmly.
e. Check the D range time lag.
i. Move the shift lever to N and wait for 1 minute.
ii. Move the shift lever to D and measure the time until the shock is felt.
iii. Repeat the 2 procedures above 3 times, and calculate the average time of the 3 tests.
f. Check the R range time lag.
i. Move the shift lever to N and wait for 1 minute.
ii. Move the shift lever to R and measure the time until the shock is felt.
iii. Repeat the 2 procedures above 3 times, and calculate the average time of the 3 tests.
Evaluation:
Test Result Possible Cause

D range time lag exceeds standard value Forward multiple clutch (C1) is worn
No. 1 one-way clutch (F1) is not operating properly

R range time lag exceeds standard value Reverse clutch (C4) is worn
No. 2 brake (B2) is worn
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM HYDRAULIC TEST
1. MEASURE LINE PRESSURE
Note
Perform the test at the normal operating ATF temperature: 50 to 80°C (122
to 176°F).
The line pressure test should always be performed with at least 2 people.
One person should observe the condition of the wheels or wheel chocks
while the other is performing the test.
Be careful to prevent SST's hose from interfering with the exhaust pipe.
This test must be performed after checking and adjusting the engine.
Perform the test with the A/C OFF and headlight OFF.
When conducting the stall speed test, do not continue for more than 5
seconds.
a. Warm up the ATF.
b. Remove the test plug on the transmission case center right side
and connect SST.
SST
09992-00095 ( 09992-00231, 09992-00271 )
c. Fully apply the parking brake and chock the 4 wheels.
d. Start the engine and check the idling speed.
e. Keep your left foot firmly on the brake pedal and move the shift
lever to D.
f. Measure the line pressure when the engine is idling.
g. Depress the accelerator pedal as much as possible with your right
foot. Quickly read the highest line pressure reading when the
engine speed reaches stall speed.
h. Perform the measure line pressure test again with the shift lever on R.
Specified line pressure:
Condition Shift Lever on D Shift Lever on R
360 to 440 kPa 360 to 440 kPa

Idling
(3.7 to 4.5 kgf/cm2, 52 to 64 psi) (3.7 to 4.5 kgf/cm2, 52 to 64 psi)
1,470 to 1,660 kPa 1,560 to 1,750 kPa

Stall
(15.0 to 16.9 kgf/cm2, 213 to 241 psi) (15.9 to 17.8 kgf/cm2, 226 to 254 psi)
Evaluation:
Problem Possible Cause
Shift solenoid valve SLT defective

Measured values at all positions are higher than specified
Regulator valve defective
Shift solenoid valve SLT defective

Measured values at all positions are lower than specified Regulator valve defective
Oil pump defective
D position circuit fluid leak

Pressure is low when shift lever is on D only
Forward multiple clutch (C1) defective
R position circuit fluid leak

Pressure is low when shift lever is on R only Reverse clutch (C4) defective
No. 2 brake (B2) defective
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM MANUAL SHIFTING TEST
Tech Tips
Through this test, it can be determined whether the trouble occurs in an electrical circuit or if it is a mechanical problem in the
transmission.
If any abnormalities are found in the following test, the problem is in the transmission itself.
a. Disconnect the connector of the transmission wire.
Tech Tips
It is possible to deactivate the electrical shift control by disconnecting the
transmission wire. The gear positions can then be changed mechanically
with the shift lever.
b. Drive with the transmission wire disconnected. Move the shift lever
to each position to check whether the gear position changes as
shown in the table below.
Shift Lever Position Gear Position
P P
R R
D 3rd
c. Connect the connector of the transmission wire.

d. Clear the DTC Click here.
Tech Tips
transmission.
Tech Tips
P P
R R
D 3rd

Tech Tips
transmission.
Tech Tips
P P
R R
D 3rd

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM REGISTRATION
Note
When the automatic transmission is replaced, the transmission compensation code must be input into the TCM (Proceed to step 1).
After the automatic transmission is reinstalled, the Quick Response (QR) code label will be positioned where the code cannot be read. Therefore,
before reinstalling the automatic transmission, record the transmission compensation codes or input them in the intelligent tester.
When the TCM is replaced, the existing transmission compensation codes must be input into the new TCM (Proceed to step 2).
1. SET TRANSMISSION COMPENSATION CODE INTO TCM (step 1)
Note
Transmission compensation codes are unique, 60-digit alphanumeric values printed on the QR label. If an incorrect transmission compensation
code is input into the TCM, shift shock may occur.
a. Record the transmission compensation code specified on the QR
label.
Tech Tips
The transmission compensation code is imprinted on the QR label.
b. Move the shift lever to the N or P position.
c. Connect the intelligent tester to the DLC3.
d. Turn the engine switch on (IG).
Note
Do not start the engine.
e. Turn the tester ON.
f. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / ECT / Utility / A/T Code
Registration.
g. Select "Set Compensation Code".
h. Register the compensation code.
i. Manually input the transmission compensation code. The
code is a 60-digit alphanumeric value imprinted on the QR
label.
i. Check that the compensation code displayed on the screen is
correct by comparing it with the 60-digit alphanumeric value on the
QR label.
Note
If an incorrect transmission compensation code is input into the TCM, shift shock will occur.
2. TRANSFER TRANSMISSION COMPENSATION CODE (step 2)
Note
Transmission compensation codes are 60-digit alphanumeric values imprinted on the QR label. If an incorrect transmission compensation code is
input into the TCM, shift shock may occur.
Tech Tips
The following operation is available for use with TCMs that can transmit the registered transmission compensation code to the intelligent tester.
a. Read the transmission compensation code
i. Move the shift lever to the N or P position.
ii. Connect the intelligent tester to the DLC3.
iii. Turn the engine switch on (IG).
Note
iv. Turn the tester ON.
v. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / ECT / Utility / A/T Code Registration.
vi. Select "Read Compensation Code".
vii. Press "Save".
viii. Select "Save".
ix. Select "Overwrite" to transfer the compensation code to the tester.
Note
Do not use the code specified on the transmission QR label even if the transmission compensation code cannot be read using
the intelligent tester. The code printed on an in-service transmission may not match its current characteristics. Replace the
TCM with a new one and perform a road test to allow the TCM to learn.
x. Turn the engine switch off.
xi. Replace the TCM.
b. Set the transmission compensation code
i. Turn the engine switch on (IG).
Note
ii. Turn the tester ON.
iii. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / ECT / Utility / A/T Code Registration.
iv. Select "Set Compensation Code".
v. Press "Open".
vi. Select "Open" .
vii. Transfer the compensation code to the TCM.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM INITIALIZATION
1. PERFORM ROAD TEST TO ALLOW TCM TO LEARN
CAUTION:
Perform the following procedures while strictly observing all traffic laws and speed limits.
Do not accelerate or decelerate rapidly.
a. The "Road Test" procedure is as follows:
i. Warm up the engine.
ii. According to the parts replaced, perform the road test shown below.
Part Replaced Road Test (w/ Shift Paddle Switch) Road Test (w/o Shift Paddle
Switch)
Perform pattern 1, 2 and 3

Automatic Perform pattern 1 and 4
transmission Pattern 1:*1
assembly With shift lever in D, after gradually accelerating to 50 km/h (31 mph) or Pattern 1:*1
more, gradually decelerate to approx. 30 km/h (19 mph) With shift lever in D, after gradually
TCM accelerating to 50 km/h (31 mph)
Valve body Pattern 2: or more, gradually decelerate to
assembly When driving at approximately 50 km/h (31 mph) with D4 range approx. 30 km/h (19 mph)
Shift selected, release accelerator pedal to allow vehicle to decelerate Pattern 4:*3
solenoid gradually to approximately 10 km/h (6 mph)
valve SL3 Pattern 3:*2 With S4 range selected, after
gradually accelerating to 30 km/h
Engine Accelerate to speed higher than 50 km/h (31 mph). While gradually (19 mph) or more, gradually
assembly decelerating with shift lever in M and 5th gear selected, downshift to 4th decelerate to approx. 10 km/h (6
ECM gear at approx. 50 km/h (25 mph), to 3rd gear at approx. 40 km/h (25 mph)
mph), and to 2nd gear at approx. 30 km/h (19 mph).
Shift
solenoid Perform pattern 1 and 3
valve SL1
Pattern 1:*1 Perform pattern 1
Shift
solenoid With shift lever in D, after gradually accelerating to 50 km/h (31 mph) or Pattern 1:*1
valve SL2 more, gradually decelerate to approx. 30 km/h (19 mph)
Pattern 3:*2 With shift lever in D, after gradually
Shift accelerating to 50 km/h (31 mph)
solenoid Accelerate to speed higher than 50 km/h (31 mph). While gradually or more, gradually decelerate to
valve SL4 decelerating with shift lever in M and 5th gear selected, downshift to 4th approx. 30 km/h (19 mph)
Shift gear at approx. 50 km/h (25 mph), to 3rd gear at approx. 40 km/h (25
solenoid mph), and to 2nd gear at approx. 30 km/h (19 mph).
valve SL5
Tech Tips
*1: After gradually accelerating over a distance of approximately 130 m (426.4 ft.) for a period of approximately 15
seconds, gradually decelerate over a distance of approximately 45 m (147.6 ft.) for a period of approximately 5 seconds.
*2: Accelerate the vehicle to a speed slightly higher than 50 km/h (31 mph).
Move the shift lever to M and select 5th gear.
Release the accelerator pedal and allow the vehicle to decelerate gradually.
When the vehicle decelerates to approximately 50 km/h (31 mph), downshift to 4th gear.
When the vehicle decelerates to approximately 40 km/h (25 mph), downshift to 3rd gear.
When the vehicle decelerates to approximately 30 km/h (19 mph), downshift to 2nd gear.
*3: After gradually accelerating over a distance of approximately 40 m (131.2 ft.) for a period of approximately 8
seconds, gradually decelerate over a distance of approximately 20 m (65.6 ft.) for a period of approximately 5 seconds.
When decelerating, apply the brakes as necessary to adjust the vehicle speed.
Tech Tips
*1: The speed, time and distance values are approximate values.
*2: After accelerating, deceleration does not need to be performed immediately.
*3: There is no specified time or distance.
iii. Repeat the road tests until the shift shock and engine speed overrun (engine speed flare when shifting) reach an
acceptable level.
Note
When repeating the acceleration/deceleration cycle of a road test pattern, bring the vehicle to a complete stop before
accelerating again.
2. RESET MEMORY
Note
Perform Reset Memory (AT initialization) when replacing the engine assembly or ECM.
Reset Memory can be performed only with the intelligent tester.
Reset Memory cannot be completed by only disconnecting the cable from the negative (-) battery terminal.
Tech Tips
The TCM memorizes the vehicle conditions when the ECT controls the automatic transmission assembly and engine assembly.
a. The "Reset Memory" procedure is as follows:
i. Turn the engine switch off.
ii. Connect the intelligent tester to the DLC3.
iii. Turn the engine switch on (IG).
iv. Turn the intelligent tester on.
v. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / ECT / Utility / Reset Memory.
Note
After performing Reset Memory, be sure to perform Road Test described previously.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM PRECAUTION
Note
If any parts are replaced, perform the following as necessary referring to the table below.
Learning by
Replaced Parts Reset Set Transmission Driving
Memory*1 Compensation Code
(Road Test)
Automatic transmission assembly -*2 Perform*3 Perform
Valve body assembly

- - Perform
Shift solenoid valve SL1, 2, 3, 4 or 5
TCM Possible - Perform*4 Perform

(If possible, read the transmission compensation code
from the previous TCM) Impossible - Perform*5 Perform
Engine assembly
Perform - Perform
ECM
Tech Tips
*1: Reset Memory cannot be completed by only reconnecting the cable to the negative (-) battery terminal.
*2: When "Set Transmission Compensation Code" is performed, "Reset Memory" is automatically completed.
*3: Compensation code of the new automatic transmission.
*4: Read the compensation code from the previous TCM, and then transfer it to the new TCM.
*5: Set the transmission compensation code of the current automatic transmission.
Registration of the transmission compensation code Click here.
Learning by driving (Road Test) Click here.
Reset Memory Click here.
Note
Reset Memory cannot be completed by only reconnecting the cable to the negative (-) battery terminal.
CAUTION:
When using compressed air, always aim away from yourself to prevent Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) or kerosene from spraying on your face.
Note
The automatic transmission is composed of precision-made parts, necessitating careful inspection before reassembly because even a small nick
could cause fluid leakage or affect performance.
The procedures are organized so that you work on only one component group at a time. This will help avoid confusion with similar-looking parts
of different sub-assemblies being on your workbench at the same time.
The component groups are inspected and repaired from the converter housing side.
Whenever possible, complete the inspection, repair and reassembly before proceeding to the next component group. If a defect is found in a
certain component group during reassembly, inspect and repair this group immediately. If a component group cannot be assembled because
parts are being ordered, be sure to keep all parts of the group in a separate container while proceeding with disassembly, inspection, repair and
reassembly of other component groups.
Use of Toyota Genuine ATF WS is recommended.
All disassembled parts should be washed clean, and compressed air should be blown through any fluid passages and holes.
Dry all parts with compressed air. Never use cloth.
The recommended ATF or kerosene should be used for cleaning.
After cleaning, the parts should be arranged in the order they were removed for efficient inspection, repairs, and reassembly.
When disassembling a valve body, be sure to match each valve with its corresponding spring.
New discs for the brakes and clutches that will be used for replacement must be soaked in ATF for at least 15 minutes before reassembly.
All oil seal rings, clutch discs, clutch plates, rotating parts, and sliding surfaces should be coated with ATF prior to reassembly.
All old gaskets and rubber O-rings must be replaced.
Do not apply adhesive cement to gaskets and similar parts.
Make sure that the ends of the snap rings are not aligned with any cutouts. Also make sure that snap rings are correctly installed into the
grooves.
If a worn bushing is to be replaced, the sub-assembly containing the bushing must also be replaced.
Check the thrust bearings and races for wear or damage. Replace them if necessary.
Use petroleum jelly to keep parts in place.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM DEFINITION OF TERMS
Term Definition
Monitor Description of what the ECM monitors and how it detects malfunctions (monitoring purpose and its
description details).
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM PARTS LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
a. The Electronic Controlled Automatic Transmission (ECT) is an automatic transmission that electronically controls shift timing
using the Transmission Control Module (TCM). The TCM detects electrical signals that indicate engine and driving conditions,
and controls the shift point based on driver habits and road conditions. As a result, fuel efficiency and power transmission
performance are improved.
Shift shock is reduced by controlling the engine and transmission simultaneously.
In addition, the ECT has the following features:
Diagnostic function.
Fail-safe function when a malfunction occurs.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM SYSTEM DIAGRAM
The configuration of the electronic control system in the AA80E automatic transmission is as shown in the following chart.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM, Diagnostic DTC:P0771
DTC Code DTC Name
P0771 Shift Solenoid "E" Performance (Shift Solenoid Valve SR)
DESCRIPTION
Tech Tips
Gear shift position when a problem occurs in shift solenoid valve SR:
TCM gear shift command 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th
Actual gear position under SR stuck OFF malfunction 1 7th 7th 7th 7th 7th 7th 7th 7th
Actual gear position under SR stuck OFF malfunction 2 3rd 3rd 3rd 3rd 7th 7th 7th 7th
DTC Detection Condition

1. Diagnosis Condition
DTC Trouble Area
Code 2. Malfunction Status
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
Shift
solenoid
valve SL2
1. ECT is 40°C (104°F) or higher, ATF temperature is -10°C (14°F) or higher, and the Shift
vehicle is driven with the shift lever in D (no malfunctions are detected in shift solenoid solenoid
valve SL1, 2, 3, 4 and 5, SR, speed sensors (NT, NC3, SP2), engine coolant temperature valve SR
sensor, oil temperature sensor, knock control sensor, electronic throttle, or CAN2) Valve body
P0771 2. When gear shifts to 5th to 8th are requested by the TCM, the engine overruns (neutral assembly
status) Torque
3. Malfunction status continues for 0.5 sec. or more (1 trip) converter
clutch
4. 2 trip detection logic assembly
Automatic
transmission
assembly
1. ECT is 40°C (104°F) or higher, ATF temperature is -10°C (14°F) or higher, and the
vehicle is driven with the shift lever in D (no malfunctions are detected in shift solenoid
valve SL1, 2, 3, 4 and 5, SR, speed sensors (NT, NC3, SP2), engine coolant temperature
sensor, oil temperature sensor, knock control sensor, electronic throttle, or CAN2)
2. One of the following occurs: Shift
solenoid
1. When gear shifts to 1st are requested by the TCM, the actual gear changes to 3rd valve SL3
gear Shift
2. When gear shifts to 2nd are requested by the TCM, the actual gear changes to solenoid
3rd gear valve SR
3. When gear shifts to 4th are requested by the TCM, the actual gear changes to 3rd Valve body
P0771 gear assembly
Torque
4. When gear shifts to 5th are requested by the TCM, the actual gear changes to 7th converter
gear clutch
5. When gear shifts to 6th are requested by the TCM, the actual gear changes to 7th assembly
gear Automatic
transmission
gear
3. Malfunction status occurs 2 times per trip
4. 2 trip detection logic
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
This DTC indicates a stuck ON malfunction or stuck OFF malfunction of shift solenoid valve SR.
The TCM commands gear shifts by turning the shift solenoid valves on/off. When the gear position commanded by the TCM and the actual gear position are
not the same, the TCM illuminates the MIL and stores the DTC.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK DTC OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO DTC P0771, P0776, P0796 AND P2714)
b. Turn the engine switch on (IG).
c. Turn the intelligent tester on.
d. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / ECT / DTC.
e. Read the DTCs using the intelligent tester.
Result
Display (DTC output) Proceed to

Only P0771, P0776 and P2714 are output A
Only P0771, P0796 and P2714 are output B
P0771, P0796, P2714, and other DTCs are output C
Tech Tips
If any other codes besides P0771, P0776, P0796 and P2714 are output, perform troubleshooting for those DTCs first.
B GO TO DTC P0796 FLOWCHART Click here
C GO TO DTC CHART Click here
GO TO P0776 FLOWCHART Click here

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION
Tech Tips

DTC Trouble Area
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
Shift
solenoid
valve SL2
status) Torque
clutch
Automatic
transmission
assembly
solenoid
gear Shift
3rd gear valve SR
P0771 gear assembly
Torque
gear clutch
gear Automatic
transmission
gear
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
PROCEDURE
Result

Tech Tips

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION
Tech Tips

DTC Trouble Area
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
Shift
solenoid
valve SL2
status) Torque
clutch
Automatic
transmission
assembly
solenoid
gear Shift
3rd gear valve SR
P0771 gear assembly
Torque
gear clutch
gear Automatic
transmission
gear
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
PROCEDURE
Result

Tech Tips

DTC Code DTC Name
P0776 Pressure Control Solenoid "B" Performance (Shift Solenoid Valve SL2)
DESCRIPTION
Based on signals from the transmission speed sensors (NT, SP2 and NC3), the gear position is detected.
If the detected gear position is different than the commanded gear position, the TCM detects related mechanical problems in the shift solenoid valves, valve
body and automatic transmission.
Tech Tips
Gear shift position when a problem occurs in shift solenoid valve SL2:
Actual gear position under SL2 stuck ON malfunction 5th 8th 7th 6th 5th 6th 7th 8th
Actual gear position under SL2 stuck OFF malfunction 1st 2nd 3rd 4th N (1st)* N* N* N*
*: Neutral

DTC
Code 2. Malfunction Status Trouble Area
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
vehicle is driven with the shift lever in D (no malfunctions are detected in shift solenoid Shift
valve SL1, 2, 3, 4 and 5, SR, speed sensors (NT, NC3, SP2), engine coolant temperature solenoid
sensor, oil temperature sensor, knock control sensor, electronic throttle, or CAN2) valve SL2
2. One of the following occurs: Valve body
1. When gear shifts to 1st are requested by the TCM, the actual gear changes to 5th assembly
P0776 gear Torque
converter
2. When gear shifts to 2nd are requested by the TCM, the actual gear changes to clutch
8th gear assembly
3. When gear shifts to 4th are requested by the TCM, the actual gear changes to 6th Automatic
gear transmission
3. Malfunction status occurs 2 times per trip assembly
Shift
solenoid
valve SL2
Shift
solenoid
1. ECT is 40°C (104°F) or higher, ATF temperature is -10°C (14°F) or higher, and the valve SR
sensor, oil temperature sensor, knock control sensor, electronic throttle, or CAN2) valve SLT
P0776 2. When gear shifts to 5th to 8th are requested by the TCM, the engine overruns (neutral Valve body
status) assembly
3. Malfunction status continues for 0.5 sec. or more (1 trip) Torque
4. 2 trip detection logic converter
clutch
assembly
Automatic
transmission
assembly
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The TCM commands gear shifts by turning the shift solenoid valves on or off. According to the input shaft speed, intermediate (counter) shaft speed and
output shaft speed, the TCM detects the actual gear position (1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th, 7th or 8th gear position). When the gear position commanded by
the TCM and the actual gear position are not the same, the TCM illuminates the MIL.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Refer to DTC P2765 Click here.
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK DTC OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO DTC P0771, P0776 AND P2714)
Result

Only P0776 is output B
Tech Tips
If any other codes besides P0771, P0776 and P2714 are output, perform troubleshooting for those DTCs first.
B INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL2 Click here
2. CLEAR DTC AND PERFORM STALL SPEED TEST

a. Clear the DTCs Click here.
Tech Tips
Write down the currently output DTCs before clearing them.
b. Perform the stall speed test Click here.
Result
Test Condition Proceed to

Stall speed test can be performed A
Stall speed test cannot be performed B
B INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SLT Click here
3. CLEAR DTC AND PERFORM RUNNING TEST

Tech Tips
b. Start the engine, drive the vehicle and perform the inspection.
Result
Test Condition Proceed

to
Transmission cannot be shifted between 1st
gear and 4th gear
Transmission can only be shifted from 4th gear A
to 5th gear
Transmission cannot be shifted between 5th
gear and 8th gear*
Transmission can be shifted from 1st gear to 4th

gear
B
For 5th gear and above, transmission shifts to
neutral
Conditions other than those listed above C
Tech Tips
*: If the transmission is shifted to 5th gear or above, gear shifts will no longer be able to be performed. When performing the test
again, first clear the DTCs.
C INSPECT SPEED SENSOR TERMINAL (NC3 TERMINAL) Click here
4. INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SR

a. Remove shift solenoid valve SR Click here.
b. Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table
below.
Standard Resistance
Tester Connection Condition Specified

Condition
Shift solenoid SR connector - Shift 20°C
solenoid SR body (68°F) 11 to 15 Ω
c. Connect the battery's positive (+) lead to the terminal of the

solenoid valve connector, and the negative (-) lead to the solenoid
body. Then check that the valve moves and makes an operating
noise.
OK
Valve moves and makes operating noise.
OK INSPECT TRANSMISSION VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY Click here
NG
REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SR Click here

5. INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL2
a. Remove shift solenoid valve SL2 Click here.
below.
Standard Resistance
Specified
Tester Connection Condition
Condition
Terminal 1 of shift solenoid valve 20°C 5.0 to 5.6
SL2 - Terminal 2 (68°F) Ω
c. Connect the battery's positive (+) lead with a 21 W bulb to

terminal 2 and the negative (-) lead to terminal 1 of the solenoid
valve connector. Then check that the valve moves and makes an
operating noise.
OK
NG
REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL2 Click here

6. INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SLT
a. Remove shift solenoid valve SLT Click here.
below.
Standard Resistance
Specified
Tester Connection Condition Condition
SLT - Terminal 2 (68°F) Ω

operating noise.
OK
NG REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SLT Click here
OK
7. INSPECT TRANSMISSION VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY

a. Check the transmission valve body assembly Click here.
OK
There are no foreign objects on any valve.
REPAIR OR REPLACE TRANSMISSION VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY

NG
Click here
OK
8. INSPECT TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH ASSEMBLY

a. Check the torque converter clutch assembly Click here.
OK
The torque converter clutch operates normally.
NG REPLACE TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH ASSEMBLY Click here
OK
REPAIR OR REPLACE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY Click here

9. INSPECT SPEED SENSOR TERMINAL (NC3 TERMINAL)
a. Disconnect the E50 transmission wire connector.
c. Measure the voltage according to the value(s) in the table below.
Standard Voltage
Tester Connection Switch Condition Specified

Condition
E50-11 (NC3B) - Body Engine switch on
ground (IG) 11 to 14 V
d. Turn the engine switch off.

e. Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table
below.
Standard Resistance
Specified
Condition
E50-12 (NC3O) - Body
ground Always 100 Ω
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (TRANSMISSION WIRE - TCM)

NG
Click here
OK
10. INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE (SPEED SENSOR NC3)

a. Disconnect the speed sensor (NC3) connector.
b. Disconnect the E50 transmission wire connector.
c. Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table
below.
Standard Resistance

Condition
Terminal 1 of the speed sensor (NC3) Below 1
Always
connector - 11 (NC3B) Ω
Always
connector - 12 (NC3O) Ω
Terminal 1 of the speed sensor (NC3) 10 kΩ or
Always
connector or 11 (NC3B) - Body ground higher
Always
connector or 12 (NC3O) - Body ground higher
NG REPAIR OR REPLACE TRANSMISSION WIRE Click here
OK
REPLACE SPEED SENSOR Click here

11. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (TRANSMISSION WIRE - TCM)
b. Disconnect the E7 TCM connector.
below.
Standard Resistance
Specified
Condition
E50-11 (NC3B) - E7-28 (NC3B) Always Below 1 Ω
E50-12 (NC3O) - E7-22 (NC3O) Always Below 1 Ω
E50-11 (NC3B) or E7-28 (NC3B) - 10 kΩ or
Always
Body ground higher
E50-12 (NC3O) or E7-22 (NC3O) - 10 kΩ or
Always
Body ground higher
NG REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR
OK
12. REPLACE TCM

a. Replace the TCM Click here.
NEXT
PERFORM A/T CODE REGISTRATION Click here

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION
Tech Tips
*: Neutral

DTC
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
P0776 gear Torque
converter
8th gear assembly
gear transmission
Shift
solenoid
valve SL2
Shift
solenoid
status) assembly
clutch
assembly
Automatic
transmission
assembly
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
Result

Tech Tips

Tech Tips
Result


Tech Tips
Result

to
gear and 4th gear
to 5th gear
gear and 8th gear*

gear
B
neutral
Tech Tips

below.
Standard Resistance

Condition

noise.
OK
NG

below.
Standard Resistance
Specified
Condition

operating noise.
OK
NG

below.
Standard Resistance
Specified

operating noise.
OK
OK

OK

NG
Click here
OK

OK
OK

Standard Voltage

Condition

below.
Standard Resistance
Specified
Condition

NG
Click here
OK

below.
Standard Resistance

Condition
Always
Always
Always
Always
OK

below.
Standard Resistance
Specified
Condition
E50-11 (NC3B) or E7-28 (NC3B) - 10 kΩ or
Always
Body ground higher
E50-12 (NC3O) or E7-22 (NC3O) - 10 kΩ or
Always
Body ground higher
OK
12. REPLACE TCM

NEXT

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION
Tech Tips
*: Neutral

DTC
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
P0776 gear Torque
converter
8th gear assembly
gear transmission
Shift
solenoid
valve SL2
Shift
solenoid
status) assembly
clutch
assembly
Automatic
transmission
assembly
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
Result

Tech Tips

Tech Tips
Result


Tech Tips
Result

to
gear and 4th gear
to 5th gear
gear and 8th gear*

gear
B
neutral
Tech Tips

below.
Standard Resistance

Condition

noise.
OK
NG

below.
Standard Resistance
Specified
Condition

operating noise.
OK
NG

below.
Standard Resistance
Specified

operating noise.
OK
OK

OK

NG
Click here
OK

OK
OK

Standard Voltage

Condition

below.
Standard Resistance
Specified
Condition

NG
Click here
OK

below.
Standard Resistance

Condition
Always
Always
Always
Always
OK

below.
Standard Resistance
Specified
Condition
E50-11 (NC3B) or E7-28 (NC3B) - 10 kΩ or
Always
Body ground higher
E50-12 (NC3O) or E7-22 (NC3O) - 10 kΩ or
Always
Body ground higher
OK
12. REPLACE TCM

NEXT

DTC Code DTC Name
P0796 Pressure Control Solenoid "C" Performance (Shift Solenoid Valve SL3)
DESCRIPTION
Based on signals from the transmission speed sensors (NT and NC), the gear position is detected.
Tech Tips
Actual gear position under SL3 stuck ON malfunction 3rd 3rd 3rd 3rd 7th 7th 7th 7th
Actual gear position under SL3 stuck OFF malfunction 1st 2nd N (1st)* 4th 5th 6th N* 8th
*: Neutral

DTC
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
valve SL1, 2, 3, 4 and 5, SR, speed sensors (NT, NC3, SP2), engine coolant temperature valve SL3
Shift
2. One of the following occurs: solenoid
gear Shift
solenoid
2. When gear shifts to 2nd are requested by the TCM, the actual gear changes to valve SR
3rd gear
Shift
P0796 3. When gear shifts to 4th are requested by the TCM, the actual gear changes to 3rd solenoid
gear valve SLT
4. When gear shifts to 5th are requested by the TCM, the actual gear changes to 7th Valve body
gear assembly
5. When gear shifts to 6th are requested by the TCM, the actual gear changes to 7th Torque
gear converter
clutch
gear Automatic
3. Malfunction status occurs 2 times per trip transmission
assembly
DTC Trouble Area
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
Shift
solenoid
valve SL3
valve SL1, 2, 3, 4 and 5, SR, speed sensors (NT, NC3, SP2), engine coolant temperature valve SLT
P0796 2. When gear shifts to 3rd or 7th are requested by the TCM, the engine overruns (neutral assembly
status) Torque
4. 2 trip detection logic clutch
assembly
Automatic
transmission
assembly
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
PROCEDURE
Result
Display (DTC output) Proceed

to
Only P0796 and P2714 are output B
Only P0796, P2714 and P2808 are output C
P0771, P0796, P2714, P2808, and other DTCs are D
output
Tech Tips
B CLEAR DTC AND PERFORM STALL SPEED TEST Click here
C CLEAR DTC AND PERFORM STALL SPEED TEST Click here
D GO TO DTC CHART Click here
A
Tech Tips
Result

3. INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SR AND SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL3

a. Check shift solenoid valve SR.
i. Remove shift solenoid valve SR Click here.
ii. Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the
table below.
Standard Resistance

Condition
Shift solenoid SR connector - 20°C 11 to 15
Shift solenoid SR body (68°F) Ω
iii. Connect the battery's positive (+) lead to the terminal of

the solenoid valve connector, and the negative (-) lead to
the solenoid body. Then check that the valve moves and
makes an operating noise.
OK
b. Check shift solenoid valve SL3.
i. Remove shift solenoid valve SL3 Click here.
table below.
Standard Resistance
Specified
iii. Connect the battery's positive (+) lead with a 21 W bulb to

terminal 2 and the negative (-) lead to terminal 1 of the
solenoid valve connector. Then check that the valve moves
and makes an operating noise.
OK
Result
Shift Solenoid Valve Condition Proceed to
Shift solenoid valve SR and SL3 are OK A
Shift solenoid valve SR is NG B
Shift solenoid valve SL3 is NG C
A INSPECT TRANSMISSION VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY Click here
B REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SR Click here
C REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL3 Click here

Tech Tips
Result

A INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL3 Click here

Tech Tips
Result


Tech Tips
c. Read the DTCs.
Result

Only P0796 and P2714 are output A

below.
Standard Resistance

Condition

operating noise.
OK
NG REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL3 Click here
OK

OK

NG
Click here
OK

OK
OK

below.
Standard Resistance
Specified
Condition
operating noise.
OK

below.
Standard Resistance
Specified
Condition

operating noise.
OK

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION
Tech Tips
*: Neutral

DTC
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
Shift
gear Shift
solenoid
3rd gear
Shift
gear valve SLT
gear assembly
gear converter
clutch
gear Automatic
assembly
DTC Trouble Area
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
Shift
solenoid
valve SL3
status) Torque
assembly
Automatic
transmission
assembly
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
PROCEDURE
Result

to
output
Tech Tips
A
Tech Tips
Result


table below.
Standard Resistance

Condition

OK
table below.
Standard Resistance
Specified

OK
Result

Tech Tips
Result


Tech Tips
Result


Tech Tips
c. Read the DTCs.
Result


below.
Standard Resistance

Condition

operating noise.
OK
OK

OK

NG
Click here
OK

OK
OK

below.
Standard Resistance
Specified
Condition
operating noise.
OK

below.
Standard Resistance
Specified
Condition

operating noise.
OK

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION
Tech Tips
*: Neutral

DTC
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
Shift
gear Shift
solenoid
3rd gear
Shift
gear valve SLT
gear assembly
gear converter
clutch
gear Automatic
assembly
DTC Trouble Area
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
Shift
solenoid
valve SL3
status) Torque
assembly
Automatic
transmission
assembly
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
PROCEDURE
Result

to
output
Tech Tips
A
Tech Tips
Result


table below.
Standard Resistance

Condition

OK
table below.
Standard Resistance
Specified

OK
Result

Tech Tips
Result


Tech Tips
Result


Tech Tips
c. Read the DTCs.
Result


below.
Standard Resistance

Condition

operating noise.
OK
OK

OK

NG
Click here
OK

OK
OK

below.
Standard Resistance
Specified
Condition
operating noise.
OK

below.
Standard Resistance
Specified
Condition

operating noise.
OK

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM MONITOR DRIVE PATTERN
1. TEST MONITOR DRIVE PATTERN FOR ECT
CAUTION:
Perform this drive pattern on a level surface and strictly observe the posted speed limits and traffic laws while driving.
Tech Tips
Performing this drive pattern is one method to simulate the malfunction detection conditions of the ECT.
The DTCs may not be detected through ordinary, everyday driving. Also, DTCs may not be detected through this drive pattern.
a. Preparation for driving
i. Warm up the engine sufficiently (engine coolant temperature is 60°C (140°F) or higher).
ii. Drive the vehicle when the atmospheric temperature is -10°C (14°F) or higher.
Malfunctions are not detected when the atmospheric temperature is below -10°C (14°F).
b. Drive pattern
i. w/ Shift Paddle Switch:
Drive the vehicle through all the gears.
Stop → 1st → 2nd → 3rd → 4th → 5th → 5th (lock-up on) → 6th → 6th (lock-up on) → 7th → 7th (lock-up on) →
8th → 8th (lock-up on).
ii. w/o Shift Paddle Switch:
Stop → 1st → 2nd → 3rd → 4th → 5th → 6th → 6th (lock-up on) → 7th → 7th (lock-up on) → 8th → 8th (lock-up
on).
iii. w/ Shift Paddle Switch:
Perform an engine braking test with the shift lever in D. While driving in the D8 range and 8th gear lock-up,
operate the "-" paddle switch and down-shift from 8th → 7th, 7th → 6th, 6th → 5th, 5th → 4th, 4th → 3rd, 3rd →
2nd and 2nd → 1st. Check that engine braking is normal for every down-shift.
iv. w/o Shift Paddle Switch:
Perform an engine braking test with the shift lever in S. While driving in the S8 range and 8th gear lock-up, move
the shift lever to "-" and down-shift from 8th → 7th, 7th → 6th, 6th → 5th, 5th → 4th, 4th → 3rd, 3rd → 2nd and
2nd → 1st.
Check that engine braking is normal for every down-shift.
v. Repeat the above drive pattern 3 times or more.
Note
When using the intelligent tester, the monitor status can be checked in the Data List Click here.
In the event that the drive pattern must be interrupted (due to traffic conditions or other factors), the drive pattern can
be resumed and, in most cases, the monitor can be completed.
Tech Tips
*: Drive at such a speed in the uppermost gear as to engage lock-up. The vehicle can be driven at a speed lower than the speed shown in the
above diagram under the lock-up condition.
Note
It is necessary to drive the vehicle for approximately 30 minutes to detect DTC P0711 (transmission fluid temperature sensor "A" performance).
CAUTION:
Tech Tips
b. Drive pattern
on).
2nd → 1st.
Note
Tech Tips
Note
CAUTION:
Tech Tips
b. Drive pattern
on).
2nd → 1st.
Note
Tech Tips
Note
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM TERMINALS OF ECU
1. TCM
Tech Tips
The standard voltage of each TCM terminal is shown in the table below.
In the table, first follow the information under "Condition". Look under "Terminal No. (Symbol)" for the terminals to be inspected. The standard
voltage between the terminals is shown under "Specified Condition".
Use the illustration above as a reference for the TCM terminals.
Terminal No. Wiring Terminal Description Condition Specified

(Symbol) Color Condition
E5-26 (P) - E5-7 W - BR Park position switch signal Engine switch on (IG) and shift 11 to 14 V
(E1) lever in P
E5-26 (P) - E5-7 W - BR Park position switch signal Engine switch on (IG) and shift Below 1 V
(E1) lever not in P
E5-34 (R) - E5- G - BR R position switch signal Engine switch on (IG) and shift 11 to 14 V
7 (E1) lever in R
E5-34 (R) - E5- G - BR R position switch signal Engine switch on (IG) and shift Below 1 V
7 (E1) lever not in R
E5-33 (N) - E5- G-R - N position switch signal Engine switch on (IG) and shift 11 to 14 V
7 (E1) BR lever in N
E5-33 (N) - E5- G-R - N position switch signal Engine switch on (IG) and shift Below 1 V
7 (E1) BR lever not in N
E5-25 (D) - E5- G-Y - D position switch signal Engine switch on (IG) and shift 11 to 14 V
7 (E1) BR lever in D, M*1 or S*2
E5-25 (D) - E5- G-Y - Engine switch on (IG) and shift

7 (E1) BR D position switch signal lever not in D, M*1 or S*2 Below 1 V
A12-2 (STP) - L - BR Stop light switch signal Brake pedal is depressed 7.5 to 14 V
E5-7 (E1)
A12-2 (STP) - L - BR Stop light switch signal Brake pedal is released Below 1 V
E5-7 (E1)
E6-27 (THO1) - G-Y - ATF temperature sensor signal ATF temperature 115°C (239°F) or Below 1.5
E6-35 (E2) BR higher V
E6-6 (SL1+) - Y-L Shift solenoid valve SL1 signal 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th or 5th gear Pulse
E6-5 (SL1-) generation
E6-4 (SL2+) - BR - Y Shift solenoid valve SL2 signal 5th, 6th, 7th or 8th gear Pulse
E6-2 (SL3+) - L-B Shift solenoid valve SL3 signal 3rd or 7th gear Pulse
Terminal No. Wiring Terminal Description Condition Specified
E7-7 (SL4+) - B-W Shift solenoid valve SL4 signal 4th or 6th gear Pulse
E7-5 (SL5+) - L - BR Shift solenoid valve SL5 signal 2nd or 8th gear Pulse
E7-3 (SLT+) - B-G Shift solenoid valve SLT signal Engine idling Pulse
E7-2 (SLT-) generation
E7-1 (SLU+) - W - L- 4th, 5th, 6th, 7th or 8th gear Pulse

E7-8 (SLU-) R Shift solenoid valve SLU signal generation
(Flex lock-up on)
E6-7 (SL) - E5-7 L-R - Shift solenoid valve SL signal All gears 11 to 14 V
(E1) BR
E7-17 (SR) - G - BR Shift solenoid valve SR signal All gears 11 to 14 V

E5-7 (E1)
E7-31 (NTB) - G-W - Power source for sensor (fixed

Engine switch on (IG) 11 to 14 V
E5-7 (E1) BR voltage)
Pulse
BR - generation
E7-25 (NTO) -
E5-7 (E1) BR Speed sensor NT signal Engine idling (shift lever in P or N) (see
waveform
1)
E7-28 (NC3B) - Power source for sensor (fixed

E5-7 (E1) G - BR voltage) Engine switch on (IG) 11 to 14 V
Pulse
generation
E7-22 (NC3O) -
E5-7 (E1) R - BR Speed sensor NC3 signal 1st, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th or 7th gear (see
waveform
2)
E7-26 (SP2B) - Power source for sensor (fixed

E5-7 (E1) Y - BR voltage) Engine switch on (IG) 11 to 14 V
Pulse
generation
E7-18 (SP2O) -
E5-7 (E1) L - BR Speed sensor SP2 signal Vehicle speed 20 km/h (12 mph) (see
waveform
3)
E6-25 (TPS1) -
E5-7 (E1) L - BR Oil pressure switch signal 6th to 8th gear 11 to 14 V
E6-25 (TPS1) -
E5-7 (E1) L - BR Oil pressure switch signal 1st to 5th gear Below 1 V
A12-3 (STA) - Cranking (shift lever in P or N,

E5-7 (E1) Y - BR Starter signal engine switch start) 11 to 14 V
A12-3 (STA) - Y - BR Starter signal Engine switch on (IG) and shift Below 2 V
E5-7 (E1) lever not in P or N
A12-4 (IG2) - R - BR Engine switch Engine switch on (IG) 11 to 14 V

E5-7 (E1)
A12-7 (BATT) - R - BR Battery (for measuring battery voltage Always 11 to 14 V

E5-7 (E1) and for TCM memory)
Terminal No. Wiring Specified
(Symbol) Color Terminal Description Condition Condition
B-
A12-6 (+B) - BR*3
Power source of TCM Engine switch on (IG) 11 to 14 V
E5-7 (E1) B-W -
BR*4
Pulse
generation
A12-18 (CAN+)
- E5-7 (E1) B - BR CAN communication line Engine switch on (IG) (see
waveform
4)
Pulse
generation
A12-28 (CAN-) -
E5-7 (E1) W - BR CAN communication line Engine switch on (IG) (see
waveform
5)

*3: for 1UR-FSE RHD
*4: except 1UR-FSE RHD
a. Using an oscilloscope, check waveform 1.
Reference
Item Content
Terminal No. (Symbol) E7-25 (NTO) - E5-7 (E1)
Tool setting 5 V/DIV., 2 msec./DIV.
Condition Engine idling (shift lever in P or N)
b. Using an oscilloscope, check waveform 2.

Reference
Item Content
Terminal No. (Symbol) E7-22 (NC3O) - E5-7 (E1)
Condition 1st, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th or 7th gear
c. Using an oscilloscope, check waveform 3.

Reference
Item Content
Terminal No. (Symbol) E7-18 (SP2O) - E5-7 (E1)
Condition Vehicle speed 20 km/h (12 mph)
d. Using an oscilloscope, check waveform 4.

Reference
Item Content
Item Content
Terminal No. (Symbol) A12-18 (CAN+) - E5-7 (E1)
Condition Engine switch on (IG)
e. Using an oscilloscope, check waveform 5.

Reference
Item Content
Terminal No. (Symbol) A12-28 (CAN-) - E5-7 (E1)
Condition Engine switch on (IG)
2. ECM
Tech Tips
The standard voltage of each ECM terminal is shown in the table below.
In the table, first follow the information under "Condition". Look under "Terminal No. (Symbol)" for the terminals to be inspected. The standard
voltage between the terminals is shown under "Specified Condition".
Use the illustration above as a reference for the ECM terminals.
Terminal No. Wiring Specified

Terminal Description Condition
A13-16 (S) - E3-1 M*1 or S*2 position Engine switch on (IG) and shift lever in M*1
G - W-B 11 to 14 V
(E1) switch signal or S*2
A13-16 (S) - E3-1 M*1 or S*2 position Engine switch on (IG) and shift lever not in
G - W-B Below 1 V
(E1) switch signal M*1 or S*2
A13-8 (SFTU) - Up-shift position switch Engine switch on (IG) and shift lever in M*1
Y - W-B 11 to 14 V
E3-1 (E1) signal or S*2
Engine switch on (IG) and shift lever in

A13-8 (SFTU) - Up-shift position switch "+" (up-shift)
E3-1 (E1) Y - W-B signal Below 1 V
Engine switch on (IG) and "+" paddle
switch operated*1
A13-7 (SFTD) - Down-shift position Engine switch on (IG) and shift lever in M*1
L - W-B 11 to 14 V
E3-1 (E1) switch signal or S*2
Engine switch on (IG) and shift lever in

A13-7 (SFTD) - Down-shift position "-" (down-shift)
E3-1 (E1) L - W-B switch signal Below 1 V
Engine switch on (IG) and "-" paddle
switch operated*1

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE
Tech Tips
Use the table below to help determine the cause of problem symptoms. If multiple suspected areas are listed, the potential causes of the
symptoms are listed in order of probability in the "Suspected Area" column of the table. Check each symptom by checking the suspected areas in
the order they are listed. Replace parts as necessary.
The Matrix Chart is divided into 2 chapters. When troubleshooting, check Chapter 1 first. If instructions are given in Chapter 1 to proceed to 2,
proceed as instructed.
If the instruction "Proceed to next suspected area shown in problem symptoms table" is given in the flowchart for each circuit, proceed to the
next suspected area in the table.
If the problem still occurs even though there are no malfunctions in any of the circuits, check the TCM and replace it if necessary.
*1: When the circuit is defective, a DTC may be stored.
1. CHAPTER 1: ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT MATRIX CHART
See
Symptom Suspected Area page
Shift solenoid valve SL1 circuit*1 Click

here
No up-shift (1st -> 2nd) Shift solenoid valve SL5 circuit*1 Click
here
TCM Click
here

here
No up-shift (2nd -> 3rd) Shift solenoid valve SL3 circuit*1 Click
here
TCM Click
here

here
No up-shift (3rd -> 4th) Shift solenoid valve SL4 circuit*1 Click
here
TCM Click
here

here
No up-shift (4th -> 5th) Shift solenoid valve SL2 circuit*1 Click
here
TCM Click
here

here
Symptom Suspected Area See
No up-shift (5th -> 6th) page

here
TCM Click
here

here
here
TCM Click
here

here
here
TCM Click
here
Click
Shift solenoid valve SL2 circuit*1 here
Click
No down-shift (8th -> 7th) Shift solenoid valve SL3 circuit*1 here
TCM Click
here

here
Click
Click
TCM
here
Click
No down-shift (6th -> 5th) Click

TCM Click
here

here
Click
No down-shift (5th -> 4th)

See
TCM Click
here

here
Click
No down-shift (4th -> 3rd) Shift solenoid valve SL3 circuit*1 here
Click
TCM here

here
Click
No down-shift (3rd -> 2nd) Shift solenoid valve SL5 circuit*1 here
Click
TCM here

here
No down-shift (2nd -> 1st)
TCM Click
here
Click
Shift solenoid valve SLU circuit*1 here
Click
Shift solenoid valve SL circuit*1 here
No lock-up or no lock-up off
Stop light switch circuit*1 Click
here
Click
TCM here
Shift solenoid valve SLU circuit*1 Click

here
Click
Shift solenoid valve SL circuit*1
here
Click
Speed sensor NT circuit*1
here

here
No lock-up Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit (for Click

1UR-FSE)*1 here
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit (for Click

1UR-FE)*1 here
See
Symptom Suspected Area
page
TCM Click
here
Click
Shift solenoid valve SLU circuit*1
here
Click
No lock-up off Shift solenoid valve SL circuit*1 here
TCM Click
here
Click
Shift solenoid valve SLT circuit*1
here
Click
Speed sensor NT circuit*1 here
Click
Speed sensor NC3 circuit*1
here
Click
Speed sensor SP2 circuit*1
here
Click
ATF temperature sensor circuit*1 here
Shift point too high or too low
Click
Throttle position sensor circuit (for 1UR-FSE)*1
here
Click
Throttle position sensor circuit (for 1UR-FE)*1
here
Pattern select (SPORT) switch circuit Click

here
Click
ECM
here
Click
TCM here

1UR-FSE)*1 here

Up-shift to 4th from 3rd while engine is cold
1UR-FE)*1 here
Click
TCM here

1UR-FSE)*1 here

1UR-FE)*1 here
Up-shift to 5th from 4th while engine is cold

page
Click
TCM
here

1UR-FSE)*1 here

1UR-FE)*1 here
Click
TCM here

1UR-FSE)*1 here

1UR-FE)*1 here
Click
TCM here
Click
Transmission control switch circuit
here
Click
Shift paddle switch circuit
here
No gear change by moving shift lever to "+" or "-" from M*2
Click
ECM here
Click
TCM
here
Click
here
No gear change by moving shift lever to "+" or "-" from S*3 ECM Click
here
Click
TCM
here
Click
Shift paddle switch circuit here
Transmission control switch circuit Click

here
No gear change by operating the "+" or "-" shift paddle
switch*2
Click
ECM
here
Click
TCM here

here
See
page
Harsh engagement (N -> D)
Click
here
Click
here
TCM Click
here
Click
Click
here
Harsh engagement (N -> R)
Click
here
TCM Click
here
Click
here
Click
here
Speed sensor NT circuit*1 Click

here
Harsh engagement (lock-up)
Click
here
Click
here
TCM Click
here
Click
Shift solenoid valve SL1 circuit*1
here
Click
here
Click
here
Click
here
Click
here
Click
here
Harsh engagement (any gear position)

See
Click
here
Click
Throttle position sensor circuit (for 1UR-FSE)*1 Click

here
Click
here
Click
TCM
here
Shift solenoid valve SLT circuit*1 Click

here
Click
Pattern select (SNOW) switch circuit
here
Poor acceleration
Click
ECM
here
Click
TCM
here
Click
No engine brake TCM
here
Click
No kick-down TCM
here
Click
here
Engine stalls when starting off or stopping
Click
TCM
here
Click
here
Click
here
ECT SNOW does not operate
Click
ECM here
Click
TCM
here
Click
Park/neutral position switch circuit*1
here
Click
Transmission control switch circuit here
See
Malfunction in shifting page
Click
Shift paddle switch circuit*2
here
Click
ECM
here
Click
TCM here
Harsh engagement (1st -> 2nd -> 3rd -> 4th -> 5th -> 6th - Click
Shift solenoid valve SR circuit*1
> 7th -> 8th) here
Click
Slip or shudder (5th -> 6th and 6th -> 5th) Shift solenoid valve SR circuit*1
here
2. CHAPTER 2: ON-VEHICLE REPAIR AND OFF-VEHICLE REPAIR

See
page
Click
Transmission control rod
here
Click
Manual valve
here
Vehicle does not move with shift lever in any forward position or reverse Click
Parking lock pawl
position here
Rear planetary ring gear Click

assembly here
Click
Torque converter clutch
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
Vehicle does not move with shift lever in R Reverse clutch (C4)
here
Click
No. 2 brake (B2)
here
Click
Valve body assembly here
Click
No up-shift (1st -> 2nd) Forward multiple clutch (C1)
here
Click
No. 1 brake (B1)
here
Click
Click
Forward multiple clutch (C1) here
No up-shift (2nd -> 3rd)

See
page
Click
No. 3 clutch (C3) here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
No up-shift (3rd -> 4th) Forward multiple clutch (C1)
here
Click
Reverse clutch (C4) here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
No up-shift (4th -> 5th) Forward multiple clutch (C1)
here
Click
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
No up-shift (5th -> 6th) No. 2 clutch (C2)
here
Reverse clutch (C4) Click

here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
here
No. 3 clutch (C3) Click

here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
here
No. 1 brake (B1) Click

here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
No. 2 clutch (C2)
here

No. 3 clutch (C3)
here
See
page
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
No down-shift (7th -> 6th) No. 2 clutch (C2) here
Click
Reverse clutch (C4)
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
No down-shift (6th -> 5th) Forward multiple clutch (C1) here
Click
No. 2 clutch (C2)
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
Click
Reverse clutch (C4)
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
No down-shift (4th -> 3rd) Forward multiple clutch (C1) Click

here
Click
No. 3 clutch (C3)
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
No down-shift (3rd -> 2nd) Forward multiple clutch (C1) Click

here
Click
No. 1 brake (B1)
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
No down-shift (2nd -> 1st) Forward multiple clutch (C1) Click

here
Click
No. 1 one-way clutch (F1)
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
See
page
Click
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
Harsh engagement (N -> D) Forward multiple clutch (C1) here
Click
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
Click
No. 2 brake (B2)
here
Click
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
here
Click
Harsh engagement (1st -> 2nd -> 3rd -> 4th -> 5th -> 6th -> 7th -> 8th) Valve body assembly
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
Forward multiple clutch (C1)
here
Harsh engagement (1st -> 2nd)
Click
No. 1 brake (B1)
here
Click
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
here
Click
No. 3 clutch (C3)
here
Harsh engagement (2nd -> 3rd)
Click
here
See
page
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
here
Harsh engagement (3rd -> 4th)
Click
Reverse clutch (C4)
here
Click
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
here
Harsh engagement (4th -> 5th)
Click
No. 2 clutch (C2)
here
Click
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
No. 2 clutch (C2)
here
Click
Reverse clutch (C4)
here
Click
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
No. 2 clutch (C2)
here
Click
No. 3 clutch (C3)
here
Click
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
Click
No. 1 brake (B1)
here
See
page
Click
here
Click
Reverse clutch (C4)
here
Slip or shudder (shift lever in R) No. 2 brake (B2) Click

here
Click
here
Click
here
Slip or shudder (1st) No. 1 one-way clutch (F1) Click

here
Click
here
Click
here
Slip or shudder (2nd) No. 1 brake (B1) Click

here
Click
here
Click
here
Click
Slip or shudder (3rd) No. 3 clutch (C3)
here
Click
here
Click
here
Click
Slip or shudder (4th) Reverse clutch (C4)
here
Click
here
Click
here
Click
No. 2 clutch (C2)
here
Slip or shudder (5th) Click

here
See
page
Click
No. 2 clutch (C2)
here
Click
here
Click
here
Click

No. 3 clutch (C3)
here
Click
Torque converter clutch here
Click
No. 2 clutch (C2)
here
Click
Slip or shudder (8th) No. 1 brake (B1)
here
Torque converter clutch Click

here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
No engine braking (1st: M1*2 or S1*3 range selected) Forward multiple clutch (C1)
here

here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
No engine braking (2nd: M2*2 or S2*3 range selected) Forward multiple clutch (C1)
here

here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
No engine braking (3rd: M3*2 or S3*3 range selected) Forward multiple clutch (C1)
here
Click
No. 3 clutch (C3)
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
See
Symptom
No engine braking (4th: M4*2 or S4*3 range selected) Suspected Area page
Click
here
Click
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
No engine braking (5th: M5*2 or S5*3 range selected) Forward multiple clutch (C1)
here
Click
Click
Click
No engine braking (6th: M6*2 or S6*3 range selected) No. 2 clutch (C2)
here
Click
Reverse clutch (C4)
here
Click
No kick-down Valve body assembly here
Click
Shift point too high or too low Valve body assembly
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Poor acceleration (all gear positions)
Click
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
here
Tech Tips
See

here
here
TCM Click
here

here
here
TCM Click
here

here
here
TCM Click
here

here
here
TCM Click
here

here

here
TCM Click
here

here
here
TCM Click
here

here
here
TCM Click
here
Click
Click
TCM Click
here

here
Click
Click
TCM
here
Click

TCM Click
here

here
Click

See
TCM Click
here

here
Click
Click
TCM here

here
Click
Click
TCM here

here
TCM Click
here
Click
Click
here
Click
TCM here

here
Click
here
Click
here

here

1UR-FSE)*1 here

1UR-FE)*1 here
See
page
TCM Click
here
Click
here
Click
TCM Click
here
Click
here
Click
Click
here
Click
here
Click
Click
here
Click
here

here
Click
ECM
here
Click
TCM here

1UR-FSE)*1 here

1UR-FE)*1 here
Click
TCM here

1UR-FSE)*1 here

1UR-FE)*1 here

page
Click
TCM
here

1UR-FSE)*1 here

1UR-FE)*1 here
Click
TCM here

1UR-FSE)*1 here

1UR-FE)*1 here
Click
TCM here
Click
here
Click
here
Click
ECM here
Click
TCM
here
Click
here
here
Click
TCM
here
Click

here
switch*2
Click
ECM
here
Click
TCM here

here
See
page
Click
here
Click
here
TCM Click
here
Click
Click
here
Click
here
TCM Click
here
Click
here
Click
here

here
Click
here
Click
here
TCM Click
here
Click
here
Click
here
Click
here
Click
here
Click
here
Click
here

See
Click
here
Click

here
Click
here
Click
TCM
here

here
Click
here
Poor acceleration
Click
ECM
here
Click
TCM
here
Click
No engine brake TCM
here
Click
No kick-down TCM
here
Click
here
Click
TCM
here
Click
here
Click
here
Click
ECM here
Click
TCM
here
Click
here
Click
See
Click
here
Click
ECM
here
Click
TCM here
> 7th -> 8th) here
Click
here

See
page
Click
here
Click
Manual valve
here
Parking lock pawl
position here

assembly here
Click
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
here
Click
No. 2 brake (B2)
here
Click
Click
here
Click
No. 1 brake (B1)
here
Click
Click

See
page
Click
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
here
Click
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
here
Click
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
here

here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
here

here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
here

here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
No. 2 clutch (C2)
here

No. 3 clutch (C3)
here
See
page
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
Click
Reverse clutch (C4)
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
Click
No. 2 clutch (C2)
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
Click
Reverse clutch (C4)
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here

here
Click
No. 3 clutch (C3)
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here

here
Click
No. 1 brake (B1)
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here

here
Click
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
See
page
Click
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
Click
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
Click
No. 2 brake (B2)
here
Click
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
here
Click
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
here
Click
No. 1 brake (B1)
here
Click
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
here
Click
No. 3 clutch (C3)
here
Click
here
See
page
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
here
Click
Reverse clutch (C4)
here
Click
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
here
Click
No. 2 clutch (C2)
here
Click
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
No. 2 clutch (C2)
here
Click
Reverse clutch (C4)
here
Click
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
No. 2 clutch (C2)
here
Click
No. 3 clutch (C3)
here
Click
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
Click
No. 1 brake (B1)
here
See
page
Click
here
Click
Reverse clutch (C4)
here

here
Click
here
Click
here

here
Click
here
Click
here

here
Click
here
Click
here
Click
here
Click
here
Click
here
Click
here
Click
here
Click
here
Click
No. 2 clutch (C2)
here

here
See
page
Click
No. 2 clutch (C2)
here
Click
here
Click
here
Click

No. 3 clutch (C3)
here
Click
Click
No. 2 clutch (C2)
here
Click
here

here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
here

here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
here

here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
here
Click
No. 3 clutch (C3)
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
See
Symptom
Click
here
Click
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
here
Click
Click
Click
here
Click
Reverse clutch (C4)
here
Click
Click
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
here
Tech Tips
See

here
here
TCM Click
here

here
here
TCM Click
here

here
here
TCM Click
here

here
here
TCM Click
here

here

here
TCM Click
here

here
here
TCM Click
here

here
here
TCM Click
here
Click
Click
TCM Click
here

here
Click
Click
TCM
here
Click

TCM Click
here

here
Click

See
TCM Click
here

here
Click
Click
TCM here

here
Click
Click
TCM here

here
TCM Click
here
Click
Click
here
Click
TCM here

here
Click
here
Click
here

here

1UR-FSE)*1 here

1UR-FE)*1 here
See
page
TCM Click
here
Click
here
Click
TCM Click
here
Click
here
Click
Click
here
Click
here
Click
Click
here
Click
here

here
Click
ECM
here
Click
TCM here

1UR-FSE)*1 here

1UR-FE)*1 here
Click
TCM here

1UR-FSE)*1 here

1UR-FE)*1 here

page
Click
TCM
here

1UR-FSE)*1 here

1UR-FE)*1 here
Click
TCM here

1UR-FSE)*1 here

1UR-FE)*1 here
Click
TCM here
Click
here
Click
here
Click
ECM here
Click
TCM
here
Click
here
here
Click
TCM
here
Click

here
switch*2
Click
ECM
here
Click
TCM here

here
See
page
Click
here
Click
here
TCM Click
here
Click
Click
here
Click
here
TCM Click
here
Click
here
Click
here

here
Click
here
Click
here
TCM Click
here
Click
here
Click
here
Click
here
Click
here
Click
here
Click
here

See
Click
here
Click

here
Click
here
Click
TCM
here

here
Click
here
Poor acceleration
Click
ECM
here
Click
TCM
here
Click
No engine brake TCM
here
Click
No kick-down TCM
here
Click
here
Click
TCM
here
Click
here
Click
here
Click
ECM here
Click
TCM
here
Click
here
Click
See
Click
here
Click
ECM
here
Click
TCM here
> 7th -> 8th) here
Click
here

See
page
Click
here
Click
Manual valve
here
Parking lock pawl
position here

assembly here
Click
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
here
Click
No. 2 brake (B2)
here
Click
Click
here
Click
No. 1 brake (B1)
here
Click
Click

See
page
Click
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
here
Click
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
here
Click
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
here

here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
here

here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
here

here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
No. 2 clutch (C2)
here

No. 3 clutch (C3)
here
See
page
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
Click
Reverse clutch (C4)
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
Click
No. 2 clutch (C2)
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
Click
Reverse clutch (C4)
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here

here
Click
No. 3 clutch (C3)
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here

here
Click
No. 1 brake (B1)
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here

here
Click
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
See
page
Click
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
Click
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
Click
No. 2 brake (B2)
here
Click
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
here
Click
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
here
Click
No. 1 brake (B1)
here
Click
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
here
Click
No. 3 clutch (C3)
here
Click
here
See
page
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
here
Click
Reverse clutch (C4)
here
Click
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
here
Click
No. 2 clutch (C2)
here
Click
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
No. 2 clutch (C2)
here
Click
Reverse clutch (C4)
here
Click
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
No. 2 clutch (C2)
here
Click
No. 3 clutch (C3)
here
Click
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
Click
No. 1 brake (B1)
here
See
page
Click
here
Click
Reverse clutch (C4)
here

here
Click
here
Click
here

here
Click
here
Click
here

here
Click
here
Click
here
Click
here
Click
here
Click
here
Click
here
Click
here
Click
here
Click
No. 2 clutch (C2)
here

here
See
page
Click
No. 2 clutch (C2)
here
Click
here
Click
here
Click

No. 3 clutch (C3)
here
Click
Click
No. 2 clutch (C2)
here
Click
here

here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
here

here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
here

here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
here
Click
No. 3 clutch (C3)
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
See
Symptom
Click
here
Click
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
here
Click
Click
Click
here
Click
Reverse clutch (C4)
here
Click
Click
here
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
Click
Valve body assembly
here
Click
here
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
1. EURO-OBD
a. When troubleshooting Europe On-Board Diagnostic (Euro-OBD) vehicles, the vehicle must be connected to an OBD scan tool
(complying with ISO 15765-4). Various data output from the vehicle's TCM can then be read.
b. Euro-OBD regulations require that the vehicle's on-board computer
illuminate the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the instrument
panel when the computer detects a malfunction in:
i. The emission control system/components.
ii. The powertrain control components (which affect vehicle
emissions).
iii. The computer.
In addition, the applicable Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
prescribed by ISO 15765-4 are recorded in the TCM
memory.
If the malfunction does not reoccur in 3 consecutive trips,
the MIL turns OFF automatically but the DTCs remain
recorded in the TCM memory.
c. To check DTCs, connect the intelligent tester to the Data Link Connector 3 (DLC3) of the vehicle. The intelligent tester
displays DTCs, the freeze frame data and a variety of the engine data.
The DTCs and freeze frame data can be erased with the intelligent tester Click here.
2. NORMAL MODE AND CHECK MODE

a. The diagnosis system operates in "normal mode" during normal vehicle use. In normal mode, "2 trip detection logic" is used
to ensure accurate detection of malfunctions. "Check mode" is also available to technicians as an option. In check mode, "1
trip detection logic" is used when reproducing malfunction symptoms to increase the system's ability to detect
malfunctions, including intermittent malfunctions.
3. 2 TRIP DETECTION LOGIC

a. When a malfunction is first detected, information concerning the malfunction is temporarily stored in the TCM memory (1st
trip). If the same malfunction is detected during the next drive cycle, the MIL is illuminated (2nd trip).
4. FREEZE FRAME DATA

a. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions (fuel system, calculated load, engine coolant temperature, fuel trim,
engine speed, vehicle speed, etc.) when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help
determine if the vehicle was moving or stationary, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich,
and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.
b. The TCM records freeze frame data in 5 different instances: 1) 3
times before the DTC is set, 2) once when the DTC is set, and 3)
once after the DTC is set. These data can be used to simulate the
vehicle's condition around the time when the malfunction occurred.
The data may help in finding the cause of the malfunction, or in
judging if the DTC is being caused by a temporary malfunction or
not.
5. CHECK DATA LINK CONNECTOR 3 (DLC3) Click here
6. CHECK MIL
a. Check that the MIL illuminates when turning the engine switch on (IG).
If the MIL does not illuminate, there is a problem in the MIL circuit.
for 1UR-FSE: Refer to the following procedures Click here.
for 1UR-FE: Refer to the following procedures Click here.
b. When the engine starts, the MIL turns OFF.
1. EURO-OBD
emissions).
iii. The computer.
memory.



not.
6. CHECK MIL
1. EURO-OBD
emissions).
iii. The computer.
memory.



not.
6. CHECK MIL
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM DTC CHECK / CLEAR
1. CHECK DTC
a. DTCs which are stored in the TCM can be displayed on the intelligent tester.
The intelligent tester can display pending DTCs and current DTCs. Some DTCs are not stored unless a malfunction is
detected in consecutive driving cycles. When a malfunction is detected in only one driving cycle, it is stored as a pending
DTC.
i. Connect the intelligent tester to the DLC3.
ii. Turn the engine switch on (IG) and push the intelligent tester ON.
iii. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / ECT / DTC.
iv. Confirm the DTCs and freeze frame data, and then write them down.
v. Confirm the details of the DTCs Click here.
Note
When simulating a symptom with the scan tool to check for DTCs, use normal mode. For codes on the DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE CHART subject to "2 trip detection logic", perform the following actions.
Turn the engine switch off after the symptom is simulated once. Then repeat the simulation process. When the symptom has
been simulated twice, the MIL illuminates and the DTCs are recorded in the TCM.
2. CLEAR DTC (using an intelligent tester)

b. Turn the engine switch on (IG) and push the intelligent tester ON.
c. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / ECT / DTC / Clear.
3. CLEAR DTC (without using an intelligent tester)

a. Perform either one of the following operations.
i. Disconnect the negative battery cable for more than 1 minute.
ii. Remove the EFI MAIN2 fuse from the No. 2 engine room relay block and junction block assembly located inside the
engine compartment for more than 1 minute.
1. CHECK DTC
DTC.
Note


1. CHECK DTC
DTC.
Note


AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM CHECK MODE PROCEDURE
1. DESCRIPTION
a. Check mode has a higher sensitivity to malfunctions and can detect malfunctions that normal mode cannot detect. Check
mode can also detect all the malfunctions that normal mode can detect. In check mode, DTCs are detected with 1 trip
detection logic.
2. CHECK MODE PROCEDURE

a. Make sure that the following conditions below are met:
i. Battery positive voltage 11 V or more
ii. Throttle valve fully closed
iii. Transaxle in the P or N position
iv. A/C OFF
b. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
d. Turn the ignition switch ON and turn the tester ON.
e. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine and ECT / Utility / Check Mode.
f. Change the ECM to check mode. Make sure the MIL flashes as
shown in the illustration.
Note
All DTCs and freeze frame data will be erased if: 1) the intelligent tester is
used to change the ECM from normal mode to check mode or vice versa;
or 2) during check mode, the ignition switch is turned from ON to ACC or
OFF.
Before check mode, make notes of the DTCs and freeze frame data.
g. Start the engine. The MIL should turn off after the engine starts.
h. Perform "MONITOR DRIVE PATTERN" for the ECT test Click here.
(Or, simulate the conditions of the malfunction described by the
customer.)
i. After simulating the malfunction conditions, use the tester to check the DTC and freeze frame data.
1. DESCRIPTION
detection logic.

iv. A/C OFF
Note
OFF.
customer.)
1. DESCRIPTION
detection logic.

iv. A/C OFF
Note
OFF.
customer.)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM FAIL-SAFE CHART
1. Description
This function minimizes the loss of the ECT functions when a malfunction occurs in each sensor or solenoid.
2. Fail-safe
a. Fail-safe control list:
Malfunctioning Part Function
Prohibits shifting to 2nd and 8th.

Lock up clutch control is prohibited.
Speed sensor NT
AI-SHIFT* control is prohibited.
Neutral control is prohibited.

Speed sensor NC3 AI-SHIFT* control is prohibited.
Prohibits shifting to 2nd and 8th.

Speed sensor SP2
AI-SHIFT* control is prohibited.
Shift solenoid valve SL1, 2, 3, 4, 5

and SR If the TCM detects a solenoid valve malfunction, it operates the fail-safe control.
Shifting between the 1st to 5th gear allowed.

Transmission fluid temperature Lock up clutch control is prohibited.
sensor AI-SHIFT* control is prohibited.
Oil pressure switch Performs same control when there is a shift solenoid valve SL1 ON malfunction.
When driving in 1st to 7th, fixes in 7th.

TCM power supply (voltage is low)
When driving in 8th, fixes in 8th.
When driving in 1st to 5th, up-shift to 6th or above is prohibited.

When driving in 6th or above, from the time the malfunction is detected, up-shift to higher gear
Knock sensor is prohibited.
Shifting to only either the 1st or 3rd gear allowed.

CAN communication Lock up clutch control is prohibited.
Tech Tips
*: In addition to the switching of the shift pattern through the pattern select switch, Artificial Intelligence Shift (AI-SHIFT) control
enables the TCM to estimate the road conditions and the driver's intention in order to automatically select the optimal shift pattern.
b. Shift Solenoid Valve Normal Operation Chart:
Gear Position 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th
Shift Solenoid Valve SL1 ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF

Shift Solenoid Valve SL2 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON
Shift Solenoid Valve SL3 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
Shift Solenoid Valve SL4 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF
Shift Solenoid Valve SL5 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
c. Fail-safe Control Chart:
Tech Tips
*1: Canceled at first vehicle stop.
*2: Not canceled at next vehicle stop.
*3: Fail-safe operation is canceled when each trip is started.
*4: Not canceled, as vehicle stop was detected at previous trip.
*5: For the shift solenoid valve SL1 OFF malfunction, the 3rd trip is started with the fail-safe ON.
Fail-safe operation is performed when the TCM detects a malfunction.
Gear position under normal conditions 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th
ON malfunction
1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th
(without fail-safe control)
Fail-safe control during ON malfunction 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 5th 5th 5th
OFF malfunction
Shift N N N N N 6th 7th 8th
Solenoid (without fail-safe control)
Valve SL1
Fail-safe control during OFF malfunction 6th 6th 6th 6th 6th 6th 7th 8th
Fail-safe control during OFF malfunction
Fixed in 3rd
(from 3rd trip)
ON malfunction
5th 8th 7th 6th 5th 6th 7th 8th
Fail-safe control during ON malfunction 5th 5th 5th 5th 5th 6th 7th 8th
Shift OFF malfunction

Solenoid 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 1st N N N
Valve SL2 (without fail-safe control)

Fixed in 7th
(until vehicle stops)
Fail-safe control during OFF malfunction*1 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 4th 4th 4th 4th
ON malfunction
3rd 3rd 3rd 3rd 7th 7th 7th 7th
Fail-safe control during ON malfunction

Fixed in 3rd
(when malfunction is detected in 4th or below)
Fail-safe control during ON malfunction Fixed in 7th

(when malfunction is detected in 5th or above) (If vehicle stops once, fixed in 3rd)
Shift
Solenoid OFF malfunction
Valve SL3 1st 2nd 1st 4th 5th 6th N 8th

(when malfunction is detected in 7th, gear position is
as shown in chart. If down-shift to 6th or below once, 1st 2nd 4th 4th 5th 6th 8th 8th
up-shift to 7th or above is prohibited.)

1st 2nd 4th 4th 5th 6th 6th 6th
ON malfunction
4th 4th 3rd 4th 6th 6th 7th 6th

Fixed in 3rd
Fail-safe control during ON malfunction Fixed in 7th

OFF malfunction
Shift 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 5th N 7th 8th
Solenoid
Valve SL4
(when malfunction is detected in 6th, gear position as 1st 2nd 3rd 5th 5th 7th 7th 7th
shown in chart. If down-shift to 5th or below once, up-
shift to 4th, 6th, 7th, and 8th is prohibited.)

(when malfunction is detected in 4th) 1st 2nd 3rd 5th 5th 5th 5th 5th
ON malfunction
2nd 2nd 3rd 4th 8th 6th 7th 8th

Fixed in 3rd
Shift
Solenoid Fail-safe control during ON malfunction Fixed in 7th
Valve SL5
OFF malfunction
1st 1st 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th N
Fail-safe control during OFF malfunction 1st 3rd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 7th
OFF malfunction
1st 2nd 3rd 4th 1st 7th 7th 7th
(when malfunction occurs in 5th or below)
OFF malfunction
(when malfunction occurs in 6th or above, or after 7th 7th 7th 7th 7th 7th 7th 7th
vehicle shifts to 7th)

Fixed in 7th
Shift (when malfunction is detected in 5th or above)
Solenoid
Valve SR
OFF malfunction
3rd 3rd 3rd 3rd 7th 7th 7th 7th
(trip is started in malfunctioning state)

Fixed in 3rd
Fail-safe control during OFF malfunction Fixed in 7th

(when malfunction is detected in 5th or above*2) (If vehicle stops once, fixed in 3rd)
Tech Tips
*1: When vehicle is driven after fail-safe detection.
*2: After trip is started in malfunctioning state.
In case of an open or short circuit, the TCM stops sending the current to the open or short circuited solenoid.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM DATA LIST / ACTIVE TEST
1. READ DATA LIST
Tech Tips
Using the GTS to read the Data List allows the values or states of switches, sensors, actuators and other items to be read without removing any
parts. This non-intrusive inspection can be very useful because intermittent conditions or signals may be discovered before parts or wiring is
disturbed. Reading the Data List information early in troubleshooting is one way to save diagnostic time.
Note
In the table below, the values listed under "Normal Condition" are reference values. Do not depend solely on these reference values when
deciding whether a part is faulty or not.
a. Warm up the engine.
b. Turn the engine switch off.
c. Connect the GTS to the DLC3.
e. Turn the GTS on.
f. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / ECT / Data List.
g. According to the display on the GTS, read the Data List.
TCM
Tester Measurement Normal Condition Diagnostic Note
Display Item/Range
Vehicle speed/
Vehicle Min.: 0 km/h (0
Speed mph) Actual vehicle speed Speed indicated on the speedometer.
Max.: 255 km/h
(158 mph)
Engine speed/
Engine Speed Min.: 0 rpm Idling: 550 to 800 rpm -
Max.: 16383.75
rpm
Calculated load/ Idling: 15.0 to 35.0%

Calculate Running without load
Load Min.: 0% -
(2000 rpm): 10.0 to
Max.: 100% 30.0%
Engine coolant
temperature/ If the value is -40°C (-40°F), the sensor circuit
Coolant Min.: -40°C (- After warming up: 80 to is open.
Temp 40°F) 105°C (176 to 221°F) If the value is 140°C (284°F), the sensor circuit
Max.: 215°C is shorted.
(419°F)
Intake air
Min.: -40°C (- Equivalent to ambient air is open.
Intake Air 40°F) temperature If the value is 140°C (284°F), the sensor circuit
(284°F)
Engine run time/

Engine Run Min.: 0 seconds Time after engine start -
Time Max.: 65535
seconds
Display Item/Range
Battery voltage/
Battery Min.: 0 V Idling: 11 to 14 V -
Voltage
Max.: 65.535 V
Throttle position
Throttle sensor output/
Sensor Volt Min.: 0% Idling: 10 to 22% Calculated value based on VTA1
%
Max.: 100%
Starter signal/
Starter Signal Open: Cranking -
Open or Close
Stop light switch Brake pedal:

Stop Light status/ Depressed: ON -
Switch
ON or OFF Released: OFF
Check mode/
Check Mode ON: Check mode ON -
ON or OFF
Check mode
SPD Test result for vehicle
Result speed sensor/ - -
Compl or Incmpl
Comprehensive
Complete component
Parts Monitor monitor/ - -
Not Avl or Avail
Fuel system
Fuel System monitor/ - -
Monitor
Not Avl or Avail
Misfire Misfire Monitor

Monitor - -
Not Avl or Avail
EGR/VVT
EGR/VVT monitor/ - -
Monitor
Not Avl or Avail
EGR/VVT
Monitor
Compl or Incmpl
Heated oxygen
O2S (A/FS) sensor (air fuel
Heater ratio sensor) - -
Monitor heater monitor/
Not Avl or Avail
Heated oxygen
Compl or Incmpl
Tester Measurement
Display Item/Range Normal Condition Diagnostic Note
Heated oxygen
sensor (air fuel
O2S (A/FS) ratio sensor)
Monitor - -
monitor/
Not Avl or Avail
Heated oxygen
sensor (air fuel
Monitor - -
monitor/
Compl or Incmpl
A/C monitor/
A/C Monitor - -
Not Avl or Avail
A/C monitor/
A/C Monitor - -
Compl or Incmpl
2nd Air 2nd air monitor/

- -
Monitor Not Avl or Avail

- -
Monitor Compl or Incmpl
EVAP monitor/
EVAP Monitor - -
Not Avl or Avail
EVAP monitor/
EVAP Monitor - -
Compl or Incmpl
Heated Heated catalyst

Catalyst monitor/ - -

Catalyst
Monitor
Not Avl or Avail
Catalyst
Monitor
Compl or Incmpl
TC Terminal
TC Terminal status/ - -
ON or OFF
Number of
# Codes Codes/
(Include Min.: 0 - Number of stored DTCs.
History)
Max.: 255
MIL status/
MIL ON: MIL ON -
ON or OFF
Tester Measurement
Normal Condition Diagnostic Note
Display Item/Range
MIL on run
distance/
MIL ON Run Min.: 0 km (0 Distance after DTC
-
Distance mile) detected
Max.: 65535 km
(40723 mile)
Running time
from MIL on/
Running Time Equivalent to running
from MIL ON Min.: 0 minutes time after MIL turns on -
Max.: 65535
minutes
Time after DTC

cleared/
Time after Min.: 0 minutes, Equivalent to time after -
DTC Cleared DTCs cleared
Max.: 65535
minutes
Distance after
DTC cleared/
Distance from Min.: 0 km (0 Equivalent to distance
-
DTC Cleared mile) driven after DTCs cleared
Max.: 65535 km
(40723 mile)
Warm-up cycle
Warmup after DTC
Cycle Cleared cleared/ - Number of warm-up cycles after DTCs cleared
DTC Min.: 0, Max.:
255
OBD OBD - -
Requirements requirement
Emissions-
Number of related DTCs/
Emission DTC Min.: 0 - -
Max.: 127
TC and TE1
terminals of
TC and TE1 DLC3/ - Active Test support data.
ON or OFF
Model Code Model code/ - -
Transmission
Transmission
(Engine) - -
Type type/
Cylinder Cylinder
Number number/ - -
Transmission Transmission
Type type/ - -
Destination Destination/ - -
Model Year Model year/ - -
System System - -
Identification identification/
Display Item/Range
Throttle sensor
Throttle positioning/
Position from Min.: 0% Idling: 0 to 10% Throttle position received from the ECM.
EFI
Max.: 127.5%
Accelerator
sensor
Accel Position positioning/
Idling: 0 to 10% Accelerator position received from the ECM.
from EFI Min.: 0%
Max.: 127.5%
Lock-up:
On (after warming up
Input shaft engine): Input turbine
speed/ speed (NT) equal to
engine speed
SPD (NT) Min.: 0 rpm Data is displayed in increments of 50 rpm.
Max.: 12750 Off (idling with shift
lever in N): Input
rpm
turbine speed (NT)
nearly equal to engine
speed
Output shaft
speed/ Vehicle stopped: 0 km/h
Min.: 0 km/h (0 (0 mph)
SPD (SP2) -
mph) (output shaft speed equal
Max.: 255 km/h to vehicle speed)
(158 mph)
When the shift lever position displayed on the

GTS differs from the actual position,
adjustment of the park/neutral position switch
Park/neutral Shift lever: or shift cable may be incorrect.
Shift SW position switch
Status (P status/ In P: ON
Range) Tech Tips
ON or OFF Not in P: OFF
When a failure still occurs even after
adjusting these parts, refer to DTC P0705
Click here.

Status (R status/ In R: ON
Range) Tech Tips
ON or OFF Not in R: OFF
Click here.

Status (N status/ In N: ON
Range) Tech Tips
ON or OFF Not in N: OFF
Click here.
Shift SW Status of PNP

Status (N, P switch (N or P)
supported/ - -
Range)
Supported Supp or Unsupp
Tester Measurement
Display Item/Range
ON: Shift lever not in

Shift SW PNP switch
P or N
Status (N, P status/ -
Range) OFF: Shift lever in P
ON or OFF or N
ON: Shift lever held in

"+" (up-shift)
-
OFF: Shift lever not in
"+" (up-shift)
Sport shift up
Sports Shift switch status/
Up SW ON: "+" shift paddle
ON or OFF operated and held
(up-shift)*1
-
OFF: "+" shift paddle
not operated (up-
shift)*1

"-" (down-shift)
-
"-" (down-shift)
Sport shift down
Down SW ON: "-" shift paddle
(down-shift)*1
-
OFF: "-" shift paddle
not operated (down-
shift)*1
Shift lever:
Sport mode
In M*1, S*2, "+" or "-
Sports Mode select switch
Selection SW status/ ": ON -
ON or OFF Not in M*1, S*2, "+"
or "-": OFF

Shift lever: adjustment of the park/neutral position switch
Park/neutral or shift cable may be incorrect.
Shift SW position switch In D, M*1 or S*2: ON
Status (D status/
Range) Not in D, M*1 or S*2: Tech Tips
ON or OFF OFF When a failure still occurs even after
Click here.
ATF
After stall speed test:
temperature
Approximately 80°C
A/T Oil sensor value/ If the value is -40°C (-40°F) or 150°C (302°F),
(176°F)
Temperature Min.: -40°C (- the ATF temperature sensor circuit is open or
While engine cold:
1 40°F) short-circuited.
Equal to ambient
Max.: 215°C
temperature
(419°F)
NT sensor
NT Sensor voltage/
Idling: 0.1 to 1.9 V -
Voltage Min.: 0 V
Max.: 5 V
SP2 sensor
SP2 Sensor voltage/
Voltage Min.: 0 V
Max.: 5 V
Tester Measurement
ON: 1st to 5th gear

Oil pressure
TPS 1 Switch switch status/ OFF: 6th to 8th gear; -
ON or OFF or shift lever is in P, N
or R
No. 3 clutch
drum speed/ 0 rpm: 2nd or 8th
gear
SPD (NC3) Min.: 0 rpm Data is displayed in increments of 50 rpm.
Above 0 rpm: 1st, or
Max.: 12750 3rd to 7th gear
rpm
NC3 Sensor
NC3 Sensor Voltage/
Voltage Min.: 0 V
Max.: 5 V
Lock-up:
Lock-up/
Lock Up Operating: ON -
ON or OFF
Not operating: OFF
TCM gear shift

command/ Shift lever in D: 1st, 2nd,
Shift Status 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th, 7th or -
4th, 5th, 6th, 7th 8th
or 8th
OFF: Accelerator
Shift solenoid
SLT Solenoid SLT status/ pedal depressed
-
Status ON: Accelerator pedal
ON or OFF
released
Shift solenoid Shift solenoid SLU:

SLU Solenoid SLU status/
Operating: ON -
Status
ON or OFF Not operating: OFF
Shift solenoid SL Shift solenoid SL:

SL Solenoid status/ Operating: ON -
Status

h. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / Engine / Data List.
i. According to the display on the GTS, read the Data List.
Engine
Tester Display Measurement Item/Range Normal Condition Diagnostic Note
Sport mode status/ ON: Sport mode on

Pattern Switch (PWR/M) -
ON or OFF OFF: Sport mode off
Snow mode status/ ON: Snow mode on

Snow or 2nd Start Mode -
ON or OFF OFF: Snow mode off
j. Enter the following menus: Body / Center Console Switch / Data List.
k. According to the display on the GTS, read the Data List.
Center Console Switch
Diagnostic
Tester Display Measurement Item/Range Normal Condition
Note
Diagnostic
Note
Combination switch
ECT Snow Mode (SNOW) status/ ON: Combination switch (SNOW) pushed
-
Switch OFF: Combination switch (SNOW) not pushed
ON or OFF
Combination switch ON: Combination switch being turned and

SPORT Mode (SPORT) status/ held at SPORT position -
Switch
ON or OFF OFF: Combination switch not turned
Combination switch ON: Combination switch being pushed and

NORMAL Mode (NORMAL) status/ held -
Switch
ON or OFF OFF: Combination switch not pushed
2. PERFORM ACTIVE TEST
Tech Tips
Using the GTS to perform Active Tests allows relays, VSVs, actuators and other items to be operated without removing any parts. This non-
intrusive functional inspection can be very useful because intermittent operation may be discovered before parts or wiring is disturbed.
Performing Active Tests early in troubleshooting is one way to save diagnostic time. Data List information can be displayed while performing
Active Tests.
e. Turn the GTS on.
f. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / ECT / Active Test.
g. According to the display on the GTS, perform the Active Test.
TCM
Tester
Test Part Control Range Diagnostic Note
Display
ON: TC and TE1

Connect are connected.
Turn on and off TC and
the TC ON or OFF OFF: TC and
TE1 connection
and TE1 TE1 are
disconnected.
[Vehicle Condition]
Activate Engine is
the
Operate shift solenoid SLU ON or OFF stopped.
solenoid
(SLU) Shift lever is in P
or N.
ON or OFF
Activate
Tech Tips [Vehicle Condition]
the Operate shift solenoid SLT OFF: Line pressure up (when Active Test Vehicle is
solenoid and raise line pressure "Activate the solenoid (SLT)" is stopped.
(SLT)* performed, TCM commands SLT
solenoid to turn off) Engine is idling.
ON: No action (normal operation)
Tester
Display
Possible to check
the operation of
shift solenoid valve
SLU.
Control shift solenoid SLU [Vehicle Condition]
Activate
to set automatic
the Lock ON or OFF Throttle valve
Up transmission to lock-up
condition opening amount:
Less than 35%.
Vehicle speed:
60 km/h (36
mph) or more.
[Vehicle Condition]
Activate Engine is
the
Operate shift solenoid SL ON or OFF stopped.
Solenoid
(SL) Shift lever is in P
or N.
Possible to check
the operation of the
Control Operate shift solenoid shift solenoid
Press "→" button: Shift up valves.
the Shift valve and set each shift
Position position Press "←" button: Shift down [Vehicle Condition]
50 km/h (30 mph)
or less.
[Vehicle Condition]
Activate
Engine is
the
Solenoid Operate shift solenoid SR ON or OFF stopped.
(SR) Shift lever is in P
or N.
[Vehicle Condition]
Activate
Engine is
the
Solenoid Operate shift solenoid SL1 ON or OFF stopped.
(SL1) Shift lever is in P
or N.
[Vehicle Condition]
Activate
Engine is
the
or N.
[Vehicle Condition]
Activate
Engine is
the Operate shift solenoid SL3 ON or OFF stopped.
Solenoid
or N.
[Vehicle Condition]
Activate
the Engine is
or N.
[Vehicle Condition]
Activate
Engine is
the
Operate shift solenoid SL5 ON or OFF stopped.
Solenoid
or N.
Tech Tips
*: "Activate the solenoid (SLT)" in the Active Test is performed to check the line pressure changes by connecting SST to the automatic
transmission, which is used in the HYDRAULIC TEST Click here as well. Note that the pressure values in the Active Test and HYDRAULIC
TEST are different.
1. READ DATA LIST
Tech Tips
Note
e. Turn the GTS on.
TCM
Display Item/Range
Vehicle speed/
Max.: 255 km/h
(158 mph)
Engine speed/
Max.: 16383.75
rpm

Load Min.: 0% -
(2000 rpm): 10.0 to
Max.: 100% 30.0%
Engine coolant
(419°F)
Intake air
(284°F)
Engine run time/

Time Max.: 65535
seconds
Display Item/Range
Battery voltage/
Voltage
Max.: 65.535 V
Throttle position
%
Max.: 100%
Starter signal/
Open or Close

Switch
Check mode/
ON or OFF
Check mode
Compl or Incmpl
Comprehensive
Complete component
Not Avl or Avail
Fuel system
Monitor
Not Avl or Avail

Monitor - -
Not Avl or Avail
EGR/VVT
Monitor
Not Avl or Avail
EGR/VVT
Monitor
Compl or Incmpl
Heated oxygen
Not Avl or Avail
Heated oxygen
Compl or Incmpl
Tester Measurement
Heated oxygen
sensor (air fuel
Monitor - -
monitor/
Not Avl or Avail
Heated oxygen
sensor (air fuel
Monitor - -
monitor/
Compl or Incmpl
A/C monitor/
A/C Monitor - -
Not Avl or Avail
A/C monitor/
A/C Monitor - -
Compl or Incmpl

- -

- -
EVAP monitor/
EVAP Monitor - -
Not Avl or Avail
EVAP monitor/
EVAP Monitor - -
Compl or Incmpl


Catalyst
Monitor
Not Avl or Avail
Catalyst
Monitor
Compl or Incmpl
TC Terminal
ON or OFF
Number of
# Codes Codes/
History)
Max.: 255
MIL status/
MIL ON: MIL ON -
ON or OFF
Tester Measurement
Display Item/Range
MIL on run
distance/
-
Max.: 65535 km
(40723 mile)
Running time
from MIL on/
Max.: 65535
minutes
Time after DTC

cleared/
Max.: 65535
minutes
Distance after
DTC cleared/
-
Max.: 65535 km
(40723 mile)
Warm-up cycle
Warmup after DTC
DTC Min.: 0, Max.:
255
OBD OBD - -
Emissions-
Max.: 127
TC and TE1
terminals of
ON or OFF
Transmission
Transmission
(Engine) - -
Type type/
Cylinder Cylinder
Number number/ - -
Type type/ - -
System System - -
Display Item/Range
Throttle sensor
EFI
Max.: 127.5%
Accelerator
sensor
from EFI Min.: 0%
Max.: 127.5%
Lock-up:
engine speed
lever in N): Input
rpm
turbine speed (NT)
speed
Output shaft
Min.: 0 km/h (0 (0 mph)
SPD (SP2) -
(158 mph)

Range) Tech Tips
Click here.

Range) Tech Tips
Click here.

Range) Tech Tips
Click here.

supported/ - -
Range)
Tester Measurement
Display Item/Range
ON: Shift lever in P or

Shift SW PNP switch
N
Range) OFF: Shift lever not in
ON or OFF P or N

"+" (up-shift)
-
"+" (up-shift)
Sport shift up
(up-shift)*1
-
not operated (up-
shift)*1

"-" (down-shift)
-
"-" (down-shift)
Sport shift down
(down-shift)*1
-
not operated (down-
shift)*1
Shift lever:
Sport mode
In M*1, S*2, "+" or "-
or "-": OFF

Status (D status/
Click here.
ATF
temperature
Approximately 80°C
(176°F)
While engine cold:
Equal to ambient
Max.: 215°C
temperature
(419°F)
NT sensor
NT Sensor voltage/
Voltage Min.: 0 V
Max.: 5 V
SP2 sensor
SP2 Sensor voltage/
Voltage Min.: 0 V
Max.: 5 V
Tester Measurement
ON: 1st to 5th gear

Oil pressure
or R
No. 3 clutch
gear
rpm
NC3 Sensor
NC3 Sensor Voltage/
Voltage Min.: 0 V
Max.: 5 V
Lock-up:
Lock-up/
ON or OFF
Not operating: OFF
TCM gear shift

or 8th
OFF: Accelerator
Shift solenoid
-
ON or OFF
released

Operating: ON -
Status

Status

Engine


Diagnostic
Note
Diagnostic
Note
Combination switch
-
ON or OFF

Switch

Switch
Tech Tips
Active Tests.
e. Turn the GTS on.
TCM
Tester
Display
ON: TC and TE1

TE1 connection
and TE1 TE1 are
disconnected.
[Vehicle Condition]
Activate Engine is
the
solenoid
or N.
ON or OFF
Activate
Tester
Display
Possible to check
the operation of
Control shift solenoid SLU shift solenoid valve
Activate SLU.
to set automatic
the Lock transmission to lock-up ON or OFF [Vehicle Condition]
Up
condition Vehicle speed: 80
km/h (50 mph) or
more.
[Vehicle Condition]
Activate Engine is
the
Solenoid
or N.
Possible to check
50 km/h (31 mph)
or less.
[Vehicle Condition]
Activate
Engine is
the
Operate shift solenoid SR ON or OFF stopped.
Solenoid
or N.
[Vehicle Condition]
Activate
Engine is
the
or N.
[Vehicle Condition]
Activate
Engine is
the
or N.
[Vehicle Condition]
Activate
Engine is
the
or N.
[Vehicle Condition]
Activate
Engine is
Solenoid
or N.
[Vehicle Condition]
Activate
Engine is
the stopped.
Solenoid Operate shift solenoid SL5 ON or OFF
or N.
Tech Tips
TEST are different.
1. READ DATA LIST
Tech Tips
Note
e. Turn the GTS on.
TCM
Display Item/Range
Vehicle speed/
Max.: 255 km/h
(158 mph)
Engine speed/
Max.: 16383.75
rpm

Load Min.: 0% -
(2000 rpm): 10.0 to
Max.: 100% 30.0%
Engine coolant
(419°F)
Intake air
(284°F)
Engine run time/

Time Max.: 65535
seconds
Display Item/Range
Battery voltage/
Voltage
Max.: 65.535 V
Throttle position
%
Max.: 100%
Starter signal/
Open or Close

Switch
Check mode/
ON or OFF
Check mode
Compl or Incmpl
Comprehensive
Complete component
Not Avl or Avail
Fuel system
Monitor
Not Avl or Avail

Monitor - -
Not Avl or Avail
EGR/VVT
Monitor
Not Avl or Avail
EGR/VVT
Monitor
Compl or Incmpl
Heated oxygen
Not Avl or Avail
Heated oxygen
Compl or Incmpl
Tester Measurement
Heated oxygen
sensor (air fuel
Monitor - -
monitor/
Not Avl or Avail
Heated oxygen
sensor (air fuel
Monitor - -
monitor/
Compl or Incmpl
A/C monitor/
A/C Monitor - -
Not Avl or Avail
A/C monitor/
A/C Monitor - -
Compl or Incmpl

- -

- -
EVAP monitor/
EVAP Monitor - -
Not Avl or Avail
EVAP monitor/
EVAP Monitor - -
Compl or Incmpl


Catalyst
Monitor
Not Avl or Avail
Catalyst
Monitor
Compl or Incmpl
TC Terminal
ON or OFF
Number of
# Codes Codes/
History)
Max.: 255
MIL status/
MIL ON: MIL ON -
ON or OFF
Tester Measurement
Display Item/Range
MIL on run
distance/
-
Max.: 65535 km
(40723 mile)
Running time
from MIL on/
Max.: 65535
minutes
Time after DTC

cleared/
Max.: 65535
minutes
Distance after
DTC cleared/
-
Max.: 65535 km
(40723 mile)
Warm-up cycle
Warmup after DTC
DTC Min.: 0, Max.:
255
OBD OBD - -
Emissions-
Max.: 127
TC and TE1
terminals of
ON or OFF
Transmission
Transmission
(Engine) - -
Type type/
Cylinder Cylinder
Number number/ - -
Type type/ - -
System System - -
Display Item/Range
Throttle sensor
EFI
Max.: 127.5%
Accelerator
sensor
from EFI Min.: 0%
Max.: 127.5%
Lock-up:
engine speed
lever in N): Input
rpm
turbine speed (NT)
speed
Output shaft
Min.: 0 km/h (0 (0 mph)
SPD (SP2) -
(158 mph)

Range) Tech Tips
Click here.

Range) Tech Tips
Click here.

Range) Tech Tips
Click here.

supported/ - -
Range)
Tester Measurement
Display Item/Range
ON: Shift lever in P or

Shift SW PNP switch
N
Range) OFF: Shift lever not in
ON or OFF P or N

"+" (up-shift)
-
"+" (up-shift)
Sport shift up
(up-shift)*1
-
not operated (up-
shift)*1

"-" (down-shift)
-
"-" (down-shift)
Sport shift down
(down-shift)*1
-
not operated (down-
shift)*1
Shift lever:
Sport mode
In M*1, S*2, "+" or "-
or "-": OFF

Status (D status/
Click here.
ATF
temperature
Approximately 80°C
(176°F)
While engine cold:
Equal to ambient
Max.: 150°C
temperature
(302°F)
NT sensor
NT Sensor voltage/
Voltage Min.: 0 V
Max.: 5 V
SP2 sensor
SP2 Sensor voltage/
Voltage Min.: 0 V
Max.: 5 V
Tester Measurement
ON: 1st to 5th gear

Oil pressure
or R
No. 3 clutch
gear
rpm
NC3 Sensor
NC3 Sensor Voltage/
Voltage Min.: 0 V
Max.: 5 V
Lock-up:
Lock-up/
ON or OFF
Not operating: OFF
TCM gear shift

or 8th
OFF: Accelerator
Shift solenoid
-
ON or OFF
released

Operating: ON -
Status

Status

Engine


Diagnostic
Note
Diagnostic
Note
Combination switch
-
ON or OFF

Switch

Switch
Tech Tips
Active Tests.
e. Turn the GTS on.
TCM
Tester
Display
ON: TC and TE1

TE1 connection
and TE1 TE1 are
disconnected.
[Vehicle Condition]
Activate Engine is
the
solenoid
or N.
ON or OFF
Activate
Tester
Display
Possible to check
the operation of
Control shift solenoid SLU shift solenoid valve
Activate SLU.
to set automatic
the Lock transmission to lock-up ON or OFF [Vehicle Condition]
Up
condition Vehicle speed: 80
km/h (50 mph) or
more.
[Vehicle Condition]
Activate Engine is
the
Solenoid
or N.
Possible to check
50 km/h (31 mph)
or less.
[Vehicle Condition]
Activate
Engine is
the
Operate shift solenoid SR ON or OFF stopped.
Solenoid
or N.
[Vehicle Condition]
Activate
Engine is
the
or N.
[Vehicle Condition]
Activate
Engine is
the
or N.
[Vehicle Condition]
Activate
Engine is
the
or N.
[Vehicle Condition]
Activate
Engine is
Solenoid
or N.
[Vehicle Condition]
Activate
Engine is
the stopped.
Solenoid Operate shift solenoid SL5 ON or OFF
or N.
Tech Tips
TEST are different.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART
Tech Tips
If a DTC is output during the DTC check, check the parts listed in the table below and proceed to the "See page" given.
*1: "Comes on" means the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illuminates.
*2: "DTC stored" means the TCM stores the trouble code if the TCM detects the DTC detection condition.
*3: w/ OBD
*4: w/o OBD
These DTCs may be output when the clutch, brake, gear components, etc., inside the automatic transmission are damaged.
Automatic Transmission System
DTC Detection Item MIL*1 Memory*2 See

Code page
P0500 Vehicle Speed Sensor "A" Comes DTC Click

on stored here
P0502 Vehicle Speed Sensor "A" Circuit Low Comes DTC Click
on stored here
P0503 Vehicle Speed Sensor "A" Intermittent / Erratic / High Comes DTC Click
on stored here
P0560 System Voltage Comes DTC Click

on stored here
P0617 Starter Relay Circuit High Comes DTC Click

on stored here
P0705 Transmission Range Sensor Circuit Malfunction (PRNDL Input) Comes DTC Click
on stored here
P0711 Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor "A" Performance Comes DTC Click
on stored here
P0712 Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor "A" Circuit Low Input Comes DTC Click
on stored here
P0713 Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor "A" Circuit High Input Comes DTC Click
on stored here
P0715 Input / Turbine Speed Sensor Circuit Malfunction Comes DTC Click
on stored here
P0717 Input Speed Sensor Circuit No Signal Comes DTC Click

on stored here
P0724 Brake Switch "B" Circuit High Comes DTC Click

on stored here
P0741 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Performance (Shift Solenoid Valve SL) Comes DTC Click
on stored here
Comes
P0746 Pressure Control Solenoid "A" Performance (Shift Solenoid Valve SL1) on*3 DTC Click
stored here
-*4
Code page
P0748 Pressure Control Solenoid "A" Electrical (Shift Solenoid Valve SL1) Comes DTC Click
on stored here
P0771 Shift Solenoid "E" Performance (Shift Solenoid Valve SR) Comes DTC Click
on stored here
P0776 Pressure Control Solenoid "B" Performance (Shift Solenoid Valve SL2) Comes DTC Click
on stored here
P0778 Pressure Control Solenoid "B" Electrical (Shift Solenoid Valve SL2) Comes DTC Click
on stored here
P0796 Pressure Control Solenoid "C" Performance (Shift Solenoid Valve SL3) Comes DTC Click
on stored here
P0798 Pressure Control Solenoid "C" Electrical (Shift Solenoid Valve SL3) Comes DTC Click
on stored here
Comes
P0872 Transmission Fluid Pressure Sensor / Switch "C" Circuit Low on*3 DTC Click
stored here
-*4
Comes
on*3 DTC Click
P0873 Transmission Fluid Pressure Sensor / Switch "C" Circuit High stored here
-*4
P0985 Shift Solenoid "E" Control Circuit Low (Shift Solenoid Valve SR) Comes DTC Click
on stored here
P0986 Shift Solenoid "E" Control Circuit High (Shift Solenoid Valve SR) Comes DTC Click
on stored here
Comes DTC Click

P2714 Pressure Control Solenoid "D" Performance (Shift Solenoid Valve SLT) on stored here
Comes DTC Click

P2716 Pressure Control Solenoid "D" Electrical (Shift Solenoid Valve SLT)
on stored here
P2757 Torque Converter Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Performance (Shift Solenoid Comes DTC Click
Valve SLU) on stored here
Torque Converter Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Control Circuit Electrical Comes DTC Click
P2759 (Shift Solenoid Valve SLU) on stored here
Comes DTC Click

P2765 Input / Turbine Speed Sensor "B" Circuit on stored here
P2767 Input / Turbine Speed Sensor "B" Circuit No Signal Comes DTC Click
on stored here
P2769 Short in Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Circuit (Shift Solenoid Valve SL) Comes DTC Click
on stored here
Comes DTC Click

P2770 Open in Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Circuit (Shift Solenoid Valve SL) on stored here
Comes DTC Click

P2808 Pressure Control Solenoid "G" Performance (Shift Solenoid Valve SL4) on stored here
DTC See
Code Detection Item MIL*1 Memory*2 page
P2810 Pressure Control Solenoid "G" Electrical (Shift Solenoid Valve SL4) Comes DTC Click
on stored here
P2817 Pressure Control Solenoid "H" Performance or Stuck OFF (Shift Solenoid Valve Comes DTC Click
SL5) on stored here
Comes DTC Click

P2819 Pressure Control Solenoid "H" Electrical (Shift Solenoid Valve SL5) on stored here
Comes DTC Click

U0100 Lost Communication with ECM / PCM "A" on stored here
Tech Tips
*3: w/ OBD
*4: w/o OBD

Code page

on stored here
on stored here
on stored here

on stored here

on stored here
on stored here
on stored here
on stored here
on stored here
on stored here

on stored here

on stored here
on stored here
Comes
stored here
-*4
Code page
on stored here
on stored here
on stored here
on stored here
on stored here
on stored here
Comes
stored here
-*4
Comes
on*3 DTC Click
-*4
on stored here
on stored here
Comes DTC Click

Comes DTC Click

on stored here
Comes DTC Click

on stored here
on stored here
Comes DTC Click

Comes DTC Click

DTC See
on stored here
SL5) on stored here
Comes DTC Click

Comes DTC Click

Tech Tips
*3: w/ OBD
*4: w/o OBD

Code page

on stored here
on stored here
on stored here

on stored here

on stored here
on stored here
on stored here
on stored here
on stored here
on stored here

on stored here

on stored here
on stored here
Comes
stored here
-*4
Code page
on stored here
on stored here
on stored here
on stored here
on stored here
on stored here
Comes
stored here
-*4
Comes
on*3 DTC Click
-*4
on stored here
on stored here
Comes DTC Click

Comes DTC Click

on stored here
Comes DTC Click

on stored here
on stored here
Comes DTC Click

Comes DTC Click

DTC See
on stored here
SL5) on stored here
Comes DTC Click

Comes DTC Click

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM, Diagnostic DTC:P0500, P0502, P0503
DTC Code DTC Name
P0500 Vehicle Speed Sensor "A"
P0502 Vehicle Speed Sensor "A" Circuit Low
P0503 Vehicle Speed Sensor "A" Intermittent / Erratic / High
DESCRIPTION
The speed sensor (SP2) detects the output axis rotation speed and inputs it into the TCM as a signal.
Based on the speed sensor (NT) signal and the speed sensor (SP2) signal, the TCM controls engine torque and shift timing.

DTC Trouble Area
No. 2. Malfunction Status
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
Speed sensor
1. 3 seconds or more after turning engine switch on (IG), +B voltage is 0 V or more (SP2)
2. Speed sensor (SP2) signal is not input Transmission
P0500 wire
3. 2 seconds (intake temperature is -10°C (14°F) or more); or 8 seconds (intake
temperature is less than -10°C (14°F)) Harness and
connector
4. 1 trip detection logic TCM
DTC Trouble Area
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
Speed sensor
(SP2)
1. 3 seconds or more after turning engine switch on (IG), +B voltage is 0 V or more
Transmission
P0502 2. Speed sensor (SP2) input signal voltage is less than 0.1 V wire
3. 2 seconds Harness and
4. 1 trip detection logic connector
TCM
Speed sensor
(SP2)
Transmission
P0503 2. Speed sensor (SP2) input signal voltage is more than 1.9 V wire
TCM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The NT terminal of the TCM detects a pulse signal from the speed sensor (NT) (input rpm). The TCM calculates gear shifts comparing the signal from the
speed sensor (NT) with that from the speed sensor (NC3).
If there is no signal from the speed sensor (SP2), or if the speed sensor (SP2) voltage is below 0.1 V or higher than 1.9 V, the TCM interprets this as a
fault, illuminates the MIL and stores a DTC.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Tech Tips
Using the intelligent tester's Data List allows switch, sensor, actuator and other item values to be read without removing any parts. Reading the Data
List early in troubleshooting is one way to save time.
Note
In the table below, the values listed under "Normal Condition" are reference values. Do not depend solely on these reference values when deciding
whether a part is faulty or not.
1. Warm up the engine.
2. Turn the engine switch off.
3. Connect the intelligent tester to the DLC3.
4. Turn the engine switch on (IG).
5. Turn the intelligent tester ON.
6. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / ECT / Data List.
7. Follow the instructions on the tester and read the Data List.
TCM:
Output shaft speed/

Vehicle stopped: 0 km/h (0 mph)
SPD (SP2) Min.: 0 km/h (0 mph) -
(output shaft speed is equal to vehicle speed)
Max.: 255 km/h (158 mph)
Tech Tips
SPD (SP2) is always 0 while driving: Open or short in the sensor or circuit.
SPD (SP2) is always more than 0 and less than 300 rpm while driving the vehicle at 31 mph (50 km/h) or more: Sensor trouble, improper
installation, or intermittent connection trouble of the circuit.
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SPEED SENSOR TERMINAL (SP2 TERMINAL)
c. Measure the voltage of the wire harness side connector.
Standard voltage
Specified
Tester Connection Switch Condition Condition
E50-21 (SP2B) - Body Engine switch on
11 to 14 V
ground (IG)

e. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connector.
Standard resistance

Condition
E50-22 (SP2O) - Body

NG
Click here
OK
2. INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE (SPEED SENSOR SP2)

a. Disconnect the speed sensor (SP2) connector.
c. Measure the resistance of the transmission wire.
Standard resistance
Specified
Terminal 1 of the speed sensor (SP2) Below 1
Always
connector - 21 (SP2B) Ω
connector - 22 (SP2O) Always
Ω
Terminal 1 of the speed sensor (SP2) Always 10 kΩ or

connector or 21 (SP2B) - Body ground higher
Terminal 2 of the speed sensor (SP2) 10 kΩ or
connector or 22 (SP2O) - Body ground Always higher
OK

c. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connector.
Standard resistance

Condition
E50-21 (SP2B) - E7-26 (SP2B) Always Below 1 Ω
E50-22 (SP2O) - E7-18 (SP2O) Always Below 1 Ω
E50-21 (SP2B) or E7-26 (SP2B) - 10 kΩ or
Always
Body ground higher
E50-22 (SP2O) or E7-18 (SP2O) - 10 kΩ or
Always
Body ground higher
OK
4. REPLACE TCM
NEXT
PERFORM AT REGISTRATION Click here

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION

DTC Trouble Area
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
Speed sensor
P0500 wire
connector
DTC Trouble Area
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
Speed sensor
(SP2)
Transmission
TCM
Speed sensor
(SP2)
Transmission
TCM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
WIRING DIAGRAM
Tech Tips
Note
TCM:
Output shaft speed/

Max.: 255 km/h (158 mph)
Tech Tips
PROCEDURE
Standard voltage
Specified
11 to 14 V
ground (IG)

Standard resistance

Condition

NG
Click here
OK

Standard resistance
Specified
Always
Ω

OK

Standard resistance

Condition
E50-21 (SP2B) or E7-26 (SP2B) - 10 kΩ or
Always
Body ground higher
E50-22 (SP2O) or E7-18 (SP2O) - 10 kΩ or
Always
Body ground higher
OK
4. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION

DTC Trouble Area
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
Speed sensor
P0500 wire
connector
DTC Trouble Area
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
Speed sensor
(SP2)
Transmission
TCM
Speed sensor
(SP2)
Transmission
TCM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
WIRING DIAGRAM
Tech Tips
Note
TCM:
Output shaft speed/

Max.: 255 km/h (158 mph)
Tech Tips
PROCEDURE
Standard voltage
Specified
11 to 14 V
ground (IG)

Standard resistance

Condition

NG
Click here
OK

Standard resistance
Specified
Always
Ω

OK

Standard resistance

Condition
E50-21 (SP2B) or E7-26 (SP2B) - 10 kΩ or
Always
Body ground higher
E50-22 (SP2O) or E7-18 (SP2O) - 10 kΩ or
Always
Body ground higher
OK
4. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

DTC Code DTC Name
P0560 System Voltage
DESCRIPTION
The battery supplies electricity to the TCM even when the engine switch is off. This power allows the TCM to store data such as DTC history, freeze frame
data and fuel trim values. If the battery voltage falls below a minimum level, the stored TCM data is cleared and the TCM determines that there is a
malfunction in the power supply circuit. When the engine is next started, the TCM will illuminate the MIL and set the DTC.
DTC No. DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area
Both of following conditions are met:

Back-up power source circuit
P0560 TCM back-up power source circuit low voltage
TCM
1 trip detection logic
Tech Tips
If DTC P0560 is set, the TCM does not store other DTCs.
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK TCM (POWER SOURCE, GROUND)
a. Disconnect the A12 and E5 TCM connectors.
b. Measure the voltage of the wire harness side connectors.
Standard voltage
Tester Connection Condition Specified Condition

A12-7 (BATT) - E5-7 (E1) Always 11 to 14 V
Standard resistance
E5-7 (E1) - Body ground Always Below 1 Ω
NG REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR (TCM - BATTERY,

GROUND)
OK
2. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION

TCM
Tech Tips
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
Standard voltage

Standard resistance

GROUND)
OK
2. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION

TCM
Tech Tips
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
Standard voltage

Standard resistance

GROUND)
OK
2. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

DTC Code DTC Name
P0872 Transmission Fluid Pressure Sensor / Switch "C" Circuit Low
DESCRIPTION
The oil pressure switch, which is built into the valve body, detects the fluid pressure of the SL1 fluid pressure circuit.

DTC Trouble Area
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
1. ECT is 40°C (104°F) or more, ATF temperature is -10°C (14°F) or more, and vehicle is Oil pressure
driven with shift lever on D (no malfunctions are detected in shift solenoid valve SL1, 2, switch
3, 4 and 5, SR, speed sensor (NT, NC3, SP2), water temperature sensor, oil Transmission
P0872 temperature sensor, knock control sensor, electronic throttle, or CAN2) wire
2. When actual gear is in 1st to 5th gear, oil pressure switch is OFF Harness and
3. Malfunction status occurs 2 times (1 trip) connector
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
1. READ VALUE USING DATA LIST (TPS 1 SWITCH SIGNAL)
a. Connect terminals TPS1 and E1 of the E5 and E6 TCM connectors.
Tech Tips
Before checking, do visual and contact pressure checks on the TCM
connector.
b. Connect the intelligent tester to the DLC3.
c. Turn the engine switch on (IG) and push the intelligent tester ON.
d. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / ECT / Data List.
e. Read the value displayed on the tester.
Result
Tester Display Proceed to

TPS 1 Switch OFF A
TPS 1 Switch ON B
B CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (TRANSMISSION WIRE - TCM)

Click here
2. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

c. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.
Standard resistance
Specified
E50-17 (TPS1) - E6-25 (TPS1) Always Below 1 Ω
E50-17 (TPS1) or E6-25 (TPS1) - Always 10 kΩ or
Body ground higher

OK
4. INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE (OIL PRESSURE SWITCH)

a. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector.
Standard resistance
Specified
Condition
Oil pressure switch connector - 17 Always Below 1
(TPS1) Ω
Oil pressure switch connector or 17 10 kΩ or
(TPS1) - Body ground Always higher
OK
REPLACE OIL PRESSURE SWITCH Click here

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION

DTC Trouble Area
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
Tech Tips
connector.
Result

TPS 1 Switch OFF A
TPS 1 Switch ON B

Click here
2. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

Standard resistance
Specified
Body ground higher

OK

Standard resistance
Specified
Condition
(TPS1) Ω
OK

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION

DTC Trouble Area
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
Tech Tips
connector.
Result

TPS 1 Switch OFF A
TPS 1 Switch ON B

Click here
2. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

Standard resistance
Specified
Body ground higher

OK

Standard resistance
Specified
Condition
(TPS1) Ω
OK

DTC Code DTC Name
P0617 Starter Relay Circuit High
DESCRIPTION
While the engine is being cranked, the positive battery voltage is applied to terminal STA of the TCM.
If the TCM detects the Starter Control (STA) signal while the vehicle is being driven, it determines that there is a malfunction in the STA circuit. The TCM
then illuminates the MIL and sets the DTC.
This monitor runs when the vehicle is driven at 12.4 mph (20 km/h) for over 20 seconds.
DTC DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area

No.
Park/neutral position
When conditions (a), (b) and (c) are met, positive (+B) battery voltage of 10.5 V or switch
more is applied to TCM for 20 seconds Starter relay circuit
(1 trip detection logic) Cranking holding
P0617 (a) Vehicle speed more than 12.4 mph (20 km/h) function circuit
(b) Engine speed more than 1000 rpm Harness and
(c) STA signal ON connector
TCM
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
1. READ VALUE USING DATA LIST (STARTER SIGNAL)
b. Turn the engine switch on (IG) and turn the intelligent tester ON.
c. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / ECT / Data List.
d. Read the value displayed on the tester.
e. Crank the engine.
f. Read the value displayed on the tester.
OK
Tester Display Condition Standard

Starter Signal Engine switch on (IG) OFF
Starter Signal Engine is cranking ON
NG INSPECT PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH Click here
OK
2. CHECK TCM (STA VOLTAGE)

Standard voltage
Tester Condition Specified

Connection Condition
A12-3 (STA) - Engine switch on (IG) and
E5-7 (E1) shift lever in P or N Below 2 V
REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR (TCM - ST/IGCT

NG RELAY)
OK
3. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

4. INSPECT PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
a. Disconnect the E60 park/neutral position switch connector.
b. Measure the resistance of the park/neutral position switch when
the shift lever is moved to each position.
Standard resistance

Shift lever position
4 (B) - 5 (L) P Below 1 Ω

4 (B) - 5 (L) Below 1 Ω
N
Result
Result Proceed to
NG A
OK (for 1UR-FSE) B
OK (for 1UR-FE) C
B CHECK CRANKING HOLDING FUNCTION CIRCUIT Click here
C CHECK CRANKING HOLDING FUNCTION CIRCUIT Click here
REPLACE PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH Click here

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION

No.
TCM
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
OK

OK

Standard voltage


NG RELAY)
OK
3. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

Standard resistance

4 (B) - 5 (L) P Below 1 Ω

4 (B) - 5 (L) Below 1 Ω
N
Result
Result Proceed to
NG A
OK (for 1UR-FSE) B
OK (for 1UR-FE) C

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION

No.
TCM
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
OK

OK

Standard voltage


NG RELAY)
OK
3. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

Standard resistance

4 (B) - 5 (L) P Below 1 Ω

4 (B) - 5 (L) Below 1 Ω
N
Result
Result Proceed to
NG A
OK (for 1UR-FSE) B
OK (for 1UR-FE) C

DTC Code DTC Name
P0705 Transmission Range Sensor Circuit Malfunction (PRNDL Input)
DESCRIPTION
The park/neutral position switch detects the shift lever position and sends signals to the TCM.
DTC
Code DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area
When condition (A) or (B) is met:

(A) Any 2 or more of the following conditions are met
simultaneously Park/neutral position switch
(2-trip detection logic) Short in park/neutral position switch
P0705 NSW input signal is on circuit
R input signal is on Harness or connector
D input signal is on TCM
(B) All signals are off simultaneously for NSW, R and D switches
(2 trip detection logic)
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
This DTC indicates a problem with the park/neutral position switch or the wire harness in the park/neutral position switch circuit.
The park/neutral position switch detects the shift lever position and sends a signal to the TCM.
For security, the park/neutral position switch detects the shift lever position so that the engine can be started only when the shift lever is in the P or N
position.
The park/neutral position switch sends a signal to the TCM according to the shift position (P, R, N or D). The TCM determines that there is a problem with
the switch or related parts if it receives more than 1 position signal simultaneously. The TCM will turn on the MIL and store the DTC.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Tech Tips
Using the intelligent tester to read the Data List allows the values or states of switches, sensors, actuators and other items to be read without removing
any parts. This non-intrusive inspection can be very useful because intermittent conditions or signals may be discovered before parts or wiring is
Note
5. Turn the intelligent tester on.
7. According to the display on the tester, read the Data List.
TCM
Tester Measurement Normal Diagnostic Note

Display Item/Range Condition
Park/neutral Shift lever:

Shift SW position In R: ON When the shift lever position displayed on the intelligent tester differs
Status (R switch status/ from the actual position, adjustment of the park/neutral position switch or
Range) Not in shift cable may be incorrect.
ON or OFF R: OFF

Shift SW position When the shift lever position displayed on the intelligent tester differs
Status (P In P: ON from the actual position, adjustment of the park/neutral position switch or
switch status/
Range) Not in P: shift cable may be incorrect.
ON or OFF OFF

Status (N In N: ON from the actual position, adjustment of the park/neutral position switch or
switch status/ Not in
Range) shift cable may be incorrect.
ON or OFF N: OFF
Shift lever:
In D,
Park/neutral M*1 or When the shift lever position displayed on the intelligent tester differs
Shift SW position
Status (D S*2: ON from the actual position, adjustment of the park/neutral position switch or
switch status/ Not in D, shift cable may be incorrect.
Range)
ON or OFF M*1 or
S*2:
OFF

PROCEDURE
below.
Standard Resistance
6 (PL) - 2 (RB) Shift lever in P Below 1 Ω
1 (RL) - 2 (RB) Shift lever in R Below 1 Ω
9 (NL) - 2 (RB) Shift lever in N Below 1 Ω
7 (DL) - 2 (RB) Shift lever in D Below 1 Ω
6 (PL) - 2 (RB) Shift lever not in P 10 kΩ or higher

1 (RL) - 2 (RB) Shift lever not in R 10 kΩ or higher
9 (NL) - 2 (RB) Shift lever not in N 10 kΩ or higher
7 (DL) - 2 (RB) Shift lever not in D 10 kΩ or higher
REPLACE PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSEMBLY

NG Click here
OK
2. CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSEMBLY (POWER SOURCE)

Standard Voltage
Specified
E60-2 (RB) - Body Engine switch on 11 to 14 V
ground (IG)
REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR (PARK/NEUTRAL

NG
POSITION SWITCH - BATTERY)
OK
3. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH - TCM)

a. Turn the engine switch on (IG).
b. Measure the voltage according to the value(s) in the table below.
Standard Voltage
Specified
Engine switch on
E5-26 (P) - Body (IG) 11 to 14 V
ground
Shift lever in P
Engine switch on
E5-34 (R) - Body (IG)
ground 11 to 14 V*
Shift lever in R
Engine switch on
E5-33 (N) - Body (IG)
ground 11 to 14 V
Shift lever in N
Engine switch on
E5-25 (D) - Body (IG) 11 to 14 V
ground
Shift lever in D
Engine switch on
E5-26 (P) - Body (IG)
Below 1 V
ground Shift lever not in
P
Engine switch on
E5-34 (R) - Body (IG)
Below 1 V
R
Engine switch on
E5-33 (N) - Body (IG)
ground Below 1 V
Shift lever not in
N
Engine switch on
E5-25 (D) - Body (IG)
Below 1 V
D
Tech Tips
*: The voltage will drop slightly due to the turning on of the back up light.
OK
4. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION
DTC

MONITOR DESCRIPTION
position.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Tech Tips
Note
TCM


ON or OFF R: OFF

switch status/
ON or OFF OFF

ON or OFF N: OFF
Shift lever:
In D,
Shift SW position
Range)
ON or OFF M*1 or
S*2:
OFF

PROCEDURE
below.
Standard Resistance


NG Click here
OK

Standard Voltage
Specified
ground (IG)

NG
OK

Standard Voltage
Specified
Engine switch on
E5-26 (P) - Body (IG) 11 to 14 V
ground
Shift lever in P
Engine switch on
E5-34 (R) - Body (IG)
ground 11 to 14 V*
Shift lever in R
Engine switch on
E5-33 (N) - Body (IG)
ground 11 to 14 V
Shift lever in N
Engine switch on
E5-25 (D) - Body (IG) 11 to 14 V
ground
Shift lever in D
Engine switch on
E5-26 (P) - Body (IG)
Below 1 V
P
Engine switch on
E5-34 (R) - Body (IG)
Below 1 V
R
Engine switch on
E5-33 (N) - Body (IG)
ground Below 1 V
Shift lever not in
N
Engine switch on
E5-25 (D) - Body (IG)
Below 1 V
D
Tech Tips
OK
4. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION
DTC

MONITOR DESCRIPTION
position.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Tech Tips
Note
TCM


ON or OFF R: OFF

switch status/
ON or OFF OFF

ON or OFF N: OFF
Shift lever:
In D,
Shift SW position
Range)
ON or OFF M*1 or
S*2:
OFF

PROCEDURE
below.
Standard Resistance


NG Click here
OK

Standard Voltage
Specified
ground (IG)

NG
OK

Standard Voltage
Specified
Engine switch on
E5-26 (P) - Body (IG) 11 to 14 V
ground
Shift lever in P
Engine switch on
E5-34 (R) - Body (IG)
ground 11 to 14 V*
Shift lever in R
Engine switch on
E5-33 (N) - Body (IG)
ground 11 to 14 V
Shift lever in N
Engine switch on
E5-25 (D) - Body (IG) 11 to 14 V
ground
Shift lever in D
Engine switch on
E5-26 (P) - Body (IG)
Below 1 V
P
Engine switch on
E5-34 (R) - Body (IG)
Below 1 V
R
Engine switch on
E5-33 (N) - Body (IG)
ground Below 1 V
Shift lever not in
N
Engine switch on
E5-25 (D) - Body (IG)
Below 1 V
D
Tech Tips
OK
4. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

DTC Code DTC Name
P0711 Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor "A" Performance
DESCRIPTION

DTC Trouble Area
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
1. Conditions (a), (b), (c) and (d) are met

(a) 10 minutes elapse after the engine is started Transmission wire
(b) The vehicle is driven 4.9 km (3.04 miles) or more after the engine is started (ATF temperature
(c) IAT is 15°C (59°F) or higher sensor)
P0711
(d) ECT is 15°C (59°F) or higher Harness or
connector
2. ATF temperature is below 20°C (68°F)
TCM
3. 3 seconds
1. 12 seconds after the engine is started, the ECT is below 50°C (122°F) and the Transmission wire
ATF is 110°C (230°F) or higher, and it takes 10 seconds or more for the ECT to (ATF temperature
reach 60°C (140°F) sensor)
P0711 2. ATF temperature does not decrease to below 110°C (230°F) Harness or
3. 3 seconds connector
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
This DTC indicates that there is a problem with output from the ATF temperature sensor and that the sensor itself is defective. The ATF temperature
sensor converts the ATF temperature to an electrical resistance value. Based on the resistance, the TCM determines the ATF temperature and detects
open or short circuits in the ATF temperature sensor circuit or faults in the ATF temperature sensor.
After running the vehicle for a certain period, the ATF temperature should increase. If the ATF temperature is below 20°C (68°F), or 110°C (230°F) or
higher after driving the vehicle for a certain period, the TCM interprets this as a fault, illuminates the MIL and stores the DTC.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Tech Tips
Note
TCM

Display Item/Range
ATF After stall speed test:

temperature Approximately 80°C
A/T Oil sensor value/ (176°F)
Temperature Min.: -40°C (- If the value is -40°C (-40°F) or 150°C (302°F), the ATF
While engine cold: temperature sensor circuit is open or short-circuited.
1 40°F)
Max.: 215°C Equal to ambient
(419°F) temperature
Tech Tips
When DTC P0712 is output and the intelligent tester output is 150°C (302°F) or higher, there is a short circuit.
When DTC P0713 is output and the intelligent tester output is -40°C (-40°F), there is an open circuit. Check the temperature displayed on
the intelligent tester in order to check if a malfunction exists.
Temperature Displayed Malfunction
-40°C (-40°F) Open circuit
150°C (302°F) or higher Short circuit
Tech Tips
If a circuit related to the ATF temperature sensor becomes open, P0713 is stored in approximately 0.5 seconds. It is not necessary to inspect the
circuit when P0711 is stored.
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK DTC OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO DTC P0711 AND P0713)
Result

Only P0711 is output A
P0711 and P0713 are output B
DTCs other than P0711 and P0713 are output C
Tech Tips
If any other codes besides P0711 and P0713 are output, perform troubleshooting for those DTCs first.
2. CHECK TRANSMISSION FLUID LEVEL

a. Check the transmission fluid level Click here.
OK
Automatic transmission fluid level is correct.
NG ADJUST FLUID LEVEL Click here
OK
3. CHECK HARNESS AND TRANSMISSION WIRE (TRANSMISSION WIRE - TCM, TRANSMISSION WIRE (ATF TEMPERATURE SENSOR))
a. Disconnect the E6 TCM connector.
below.
Standard Resistance

Condition
E6-27 (THO1) - E6- ATF temperature 10°C
35 (E2) (50°F) 5.8 to 7.1 kΩ
E6-27 (THO1) - E6- ATF temperature 25°C 2.5 to 4.5 kΩ

35 (E2) (77°F)
E6-27 (THO1) - E6- ATF temperature
35 (E2) 110°C (230°F) 231 to 263 Ω
Tech Tips
The resistance value for the 25°C (77°F) ATF temperature condition is a
reference value.
c. Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below.
Standard Resistance
Specified
10 kΩ or
E6-27 (THO1) - Body ground Always
higher
E6-35 (E2) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or

higher
E6-27 (THO1) or E6-35 (E2) - 10 kΩ or
Body ground Always higher
NG CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (TRANSMISSION WIRE - TCM)

Click here
OK
4. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

below.
Standard Resistance

E50-8 (OIL) - E6-27 (THO1) Always Below 1 Ω
E50-9 (E2) - E6-35 (E2) Always Below 1 Ω
OK
REPAIR OR REPLACE TRANSMISSION WIRE Click here

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION
DTC
Either condition is met (2-trip detection logic): Transmission wire (ATF

(a) Certain monitor enabling conditions are met and the ATF temperature temperature sensor)
P0711 is below 20°C (68°F).
Harness or connector
(b) Certain monitor enabling conditions are met and the ATF temperature TCM
is 110°C (230°F) or higher.
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
WIRING DIAGRAM
Tech Tips
Note
TCM
Display Item/Range

1 40°F) While engine cold: temperature sensor circuit is open or short-circuited.
Tech Tips
Tech Tips
PROCEDURE
Result

Tech Tips

OK
OK
below.
Standard Resistance
Condition
35 (E2) (50°F) 5.8 to 7.1 kΩ

35 (E2) (77°F) 2.5 to 4.5 kΩ
E6-27 (THO1) - E6- ATF temperature 231 to 263 Ω

35 (E2) 110°C (230°F)
Tech Tips
reference value.
Standard Resistance

E6-27 (THO1) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
E6-35 (E2) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher

Click here
OK
4. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

below.
Standard Resistance

OK

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION
DTC
Either condition is met (2-trip detection logic): Transmission wire (ATF

(a) Certain monitor enabling conditions are met and the ATF temperature temperature sensor)
P0711 is below 20°C (68°F).
(b) Certain monitor enabling conditions are met and the ATF temperature TCM
is 110°C (230°F) or higher.
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
WIRING DIAGRAM
Tech Tips
Note
TCM
Display Item/Range

1 40°F) While engine cold: temperature sensor circuit is open or short-circuited.
Tech Tips
Tech Tips
PROCEDURE
Result

Tech Tips

OK
OK
below.
Standard Resistance
Condition
35 (E2) (50°F) 5.8 to 7.1 kΩ

35 (E2) (77°F) 2.5 to 4.5 kΩ

35 (E2) 110°C (230°F)
Tech Tips
reference value.
Standard Resistance


Click here
OK
4. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

below.
Standard Resistance

OK

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM, Diagnostic DTC:P0712, P0713
DTC Code DTC Name
P0712 Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor "A" Circuit Low Input
P0713 Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor "A" Circuit High Input
DESCRIPTION
The transmission fluid temperature is detected using the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) temperature sensor, which is built onto the valve body.
Depending on the fluid temperature, a signal is input into the TCM.
The TCM applies a voltage to the temperature sensor through TCM terminal OIL.
The sensor resistance changes with the ATF temperature. As the temperature becomes higher, the sensor resistance decreases.
One terminal of the sensor is grounded so that the sensor resistance decreases and the voltage decreases as the temperature becomes higher.
The TCM calculates the ATF temperature based on the voltage signal.

DTC Trouble Area
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
1. P0713 is not output Transmission wire (ATF

2. ATF temperature sensor resistance is below 79 Ω temperature sensor)
P0712 Harness and connector
3. 0.5 seconds
1. P0712 is not stored, and either 15 minutes or more have passed after
engine is started, or diagnosis condition for DTC P0711 is met Transmission wire (ATF
2. ATF temperature sensor resistance is higher than 156 kΩ temperature sensor)
3. 0.5 seconds
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The ATF temperature sensor converts ATF temperature to an electrical resistance value. Based on the resistance, the TCM determines the ATF
temperature, and the TCM detects an open or short in the ATF temperature circuit. If the resistance value of the ATF temperature is less than 79 Ω*1 or
more than 156 kΩ*2, the TCM interprets this as a fault in the ATF sensor or wiring. The TCM illuminates the MIL and stores a DTC.
Tech Tips
*1: 150°C (302°F) or more is indicated regardless of the actual ATF temperature.
*2: -40°C (-40°F) is indicated regardless of the actual ATF temperature.
The ATF temperature can be checked on the intelligent tester display.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Tech Tips
Note
TCM:

Display Item/Range
ATF
temperature After stall speed test:
sensor value/ Approximately 80°C
A/T Oil (176°F)
Temperature Min.: -40°C (- If value is -40°C (-40°F) or 150°C (302°F), ATF
1 40°F) Equal to ambient temperature sensor circuit is open or short circuited
temperature while engine
Max.: 215°C is cold
(419°F)
Tech Tips
When DTC P0712 is output and the intelligent tester output is 150°C (302°F) or more, there is a short circuit.
When DTC P0713 is output and the intelligent tester output is -40°C (-40°F), there is an open circuit.
Measure the resistance between terminal OIL (OT) and the body ground.
150°C (302°F) or more Short circuit

Tech Tips
If a circuit related to the ATF temperature sensor becomes open, P0713 is set in approximately 0.5 seconds.
It is not necessary to inspect the circuit when P0711 is set.
PROCEDURE
b. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connector.
Standard resistance
Specified
35 (E2) (50°F)
35 (E2) (77°F) 2.5 to 4.5 kΩ

35 (E2) 110°C (230°F)
Tech Tips
reference value.
Standard resistance

Condition
10 kΩ or
E6-27 (THO1) - Body ground Always higher
10 kΩ or
E6-35 (E2) - Body ground Always higher
E6-27 (THO1) or E6-35 (E2) - Always 10 kΩ or
Body ground higher

Click here
OK
2. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

Standard resistance
Specified
E50-8 (OIL) or E6-27 (THO1) - 10 kΩ or
Always
Body ground higher
E50-9 (E2) or E6-35 (E2) - Body Always 10 kΩ or
ground higher
OK

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION
The ATF temperature sensor converts the fluid temperature into a resistance value for use by the TCM.
The TCM applies a voltage to the temperature sensor through terminal THO1 of the TCM.
One terminal of the sensor is grounded so that the sensor resistance decreases and the voltage goes down as the temperature becomes higher.
The TCM calculates the fluid temperature based on the voltage signal.

DTC
No. 2. Malfunction Status Trouble Area
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other

3. 0.5 seconds
temperature sensor)
P0713 2. ATF temperature sensor resistance is higher than 156 kΩ Harness and connector
3. 0.5 seconds TCM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
Tech Tips
WIRING DIAGRAM
Tech Tips
Note
TCM:
Tester Measurement
ATF
A/T Oil (176°F)
(419°F)
Tech Tips
Tech Tips
PROCEDURE
Standard resistance

Condition
35 (E2) (50°F) 5.8 to 7.1 kΩ

35 (E2) (77°F)
35 (E2) 110°C (230°F) 231 to 263 Ω
Tech Tips
reference value.
Standard resistance


NG
Click here
OK
2. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

Standard resistance
Specified

E50-8 (OIL) or E6-27 (THO1) - Always 10 kΩ or
Body ground higher
E50-9 (E2) or E6-35 (E2) - Body 10 kΩ or
ground Always higher
OK

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION
The ATF temperature sensor converts the fluid temperature into a resistance value for use by the TCM.
The TCM applies a voltage to the temperature sensor through terminal THO1 of the TCM.
One terminal of the sensor is grounded so that the sensor resistance decreases and the voltage goes down as the temperature becomes higher.
The TCM calculates the fluid temperature based on the voltage signal.

DTC
No. 2. Malfunction Status Trouble Area
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other

3. 0.5 seconds
temperature sensor)
P0713 2. ATF temperature sensor resistance is higher than 156 kΩ Harness and connector
3. 0.5 seconds TCM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
Tech Tips
WIRING DIAGRAM
Tech Tips
Note
TCM:
Tester Measurement
ATF
A/T Oil (176°F)
(302°F)
Tech Tips
Tech Tips
PROCEDURE
Standard resistance

Condition
35 (E2) (50°F) 5.8 to 7.1 kΩ

35 (E2) (77°F)
35 (E2) 110°C (230°F) 231 to 263 Ω
Tech Tips
reference value.
Standard resistance


NG
Click here
OK
2. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

Standard resistance
Specified

E50-8 (OIL) or E6-27 (THO1) - Always 10 kΩ or
Body ground higher
E50-9 (E2) or E6-35 (E2) - Body 10 kΩ or
OK

DTC Code DTC Name
P0715 Input / Turbine Speed Sensor Circuit Malfunction
P0717 Input Speed Sensor Circuit No Signal
DESCRIPTION
The speed sensor (NT) detects the input shaft rotation speed and inputs it into the TCM as a signal.
Based on the transmission speed sensor (NT) signal and the transmission speed sensor (NC3 and SP2) signal, the TCM controls engine torque and shift
timing. Also, based on the input shaft rotation speed and the engine rpm signal, lock-up control is performed.

DTC Trouble Area
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
Speed
sensor (NT)
1. +B voltage is 10 V or more, and no speed sensor (NT) signal malfunction is detected
Transmission
P0715 2. Speed sensor (NT) input voltage is less than 0.1 V, or more than 1.9 V wire
3. 4.5 seconds Harness and
TCM
Speed
1. When shifting between 2nd and 8th gear, output shaft rotation speed is 1000 rpm or sensor (NT)
more, +B voltage is 10 V or more, and PNP switch and speed sensor (NT) are normal Transmission
P0717 2. Speed sensor (NT) value is less than 300 rpm wire
TCM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
speed sensor (NT) with that from the speed sensor (SP2).
If the sensor voltage is below 0.1 V or higher than 1.9 V, the TCM interprets this as a fault, illuminates the MIL and stores the DTC.
Also, while the vehicle is operating in 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th, 7th or 8th gear with the shift lever in D, if the input shaft speed is less than 300 rpm*1
although the output shaft speed is more than 1,000 rpm*2, the TCM interprets this as a fault, illuminates the MIL and stores the DTC.
*1: A pulse is not output or is irregularly output.
*2: The vehicle speed is 50 km/h (31 mph) or more.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Tech Tips
Note
TCM:
Display Item/Range
Input shaft Lock-up is

speed/ Max.: 12750 rpm ON (after warming up engine): Input turbine
SPD Min.: 0 rpm speed (NT) is equal to engine speed Data is displayed in
(NT) increments of 50 rpm
Max.: 12750 OFF (idling with shift lever on N): Input turbine speed (NT) is
rpm nearly equal to engine speed
Tech Tips
SPD (NT) is always 0 while driving: Open or short in the sensor or circuit.
SPD (NT) is always more than 0 and less than 300 rpm while driving the vehicle at 50 km/h (31 mph) or more: Sensor trouble, improper
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK SPEED SENSOR TERMINAL (NT TERMINAL)
Standard voltage
Specified
E50-1 (NTB) - Body Engine switch on 11 to 14 V
ground (IG)

Standard resistance

E50-2 (NTO) - Body ground Always 100 Ω

Click here
OK
2. INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE (SPEED SENSOR NT)

a. Disconnect the speed sensor (NT) connector.
Standard resistance

Condition
Terminal 1 of the speed sensor (NT) Below 1
connector - 1 (NTB) Always Ω
Always
connector - 2 (NTO) Ω
Terminal 1 of the speed sensor (NT) Always 10 kΩ or
connector or 1 (NTB) - Body ground higher
Terminal 2 of the speed sensor (NT) 10 kΩ or
connector or 2 (NTO) - Body ground Always higher
OK

Standard resistance
Specified
Condition
E50-1 (NTB) - E7-31 (NTB) Always Below 1 Ω
E50-2 (NTO) - E7-25 (NTO) Always Below 1 Ω
E50-1 (NTB) or E7-31 (NTB) - Body Always 10 kΩ or
ground higher
E50-2 (NTO) or E7-25 (NTO) - 10 kΩ or
OK
4. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION

DTC Trouble Area
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
Speed
sensor (NT)
Transmission
TCM
Speed
TCM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
WIRING DIAGRAM
Tech Tips
Note
TCM:
Display Item/Range

Tech Tips
PROCEDURE
Standard voltage
Specified
ground (IG)

Standard resistance


Click here
OK

Standard resistance

Condition
Always
OK

Standard resistance
Specified
Condition
ground higher
E50-2 (NTO) or E7-25 (NTO) - 10 kΩ or
OK
4. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION

DTC Trouble Area
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
Speed
sensor (NT)
Transmission
TCM
Speed
TCM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
WIRING DIAGRAM
Tech Tips
Note
TCM:
Display Item/Range

Tech Tips
PROCEDURE
Standard voltage
Specified
ground (IG)

Standard resistance


Click here
OK

Standard resistance

Condition
Always
OK

Standard resistance
Specified
Condition
ground higher
E50-2 (NTO) or E7-25 (NTO) - 10 kΩ or
OK
4. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

DTC Code DTC Name
P0724 Brake Switch "B" Circuit High
DESCRIPTION
The purpose of this circuit is to prevent the engine from stalling while driving in the lock-up condition when the brakes are suddenly applied.
When the brake pedal is depressed, this switch sends a signal to the TCM. Then the TCM cancels the operation of the lock-up clutch while braking is in
progress.

No.
Stop light switch

Both of following conditions are met: Short in stop light
Stop light switch remains ON even when vehicle is driven in GO (30 km/h (18.63 switch signal circuit
P0724 mph) or more) and STOP (less than 3 km/h (1.86 mph)) pattern 5 times Harness and
2 trip detection logic connector
TCM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
This DTC indicates that the stop light switch remains ON. When the stop light switch remains ON during GO and STOP driving, the TCM interprets this as a
fault in the stop light switch. Then the MIL illuminates and the TCM stores the DTC. The vehicle must GO (30 km/h (18.63 mph) or more) and STOP (less
than 3 km/h (1.86 mph)) 5 times for 2 driving cycles in order for the DTC to be output.
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
1. READ VALUE USING INTELLIGENT TESTER (STOP LIGHT SWITCH)
d. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / ECT / Data List / Stop Light Switch.
e. Read the value displayed on the intelligent tester when the brake pedal is depressed and released.
OK
Tester Display Measurement Normal Condition

Item/Range
Brake pedal:
Stop Light Stop light switch status/ Depressed:
Switch ON
ON or OFF
Released:
OFF
NG CHECK STOP LIGHT SWITCH INSTALLATION Click here
OK
CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS Click here

2. CHECK STOP LIGHT SWITCH INSTALLATION
a. Check the stop light switch assembly installation Click here.
OK
Stop light switch is installed correctly.
NG SECURELY REINSTALL STOP LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY Click here
OK
3. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (STOP LIGHT SWITCH - TCM)

a. Disconnect the A79 stop light switch connector.
b. Disconnect the A12 TCM connector.
Standard Resistance

A79-2 (L) - A12-2 (STP) Always Below 1 Ω
A79-2 (L) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
A12-2 (STP) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
OK
4. CHECK STOP LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY

a. Check the stop light switch assembly Click here.
NG REPLACE STOP LIGHT SWITCH ASSEMBLY Click here
OK
5. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION
progress.

No.
Stop light switch

TCM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
OK

Item/Range
Brake pedal:
Switch ON
ON or OFF
Released:
OFF
OK

OK
OK

Standard Resistance

OK

OK
5. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION
progress.

No.
Stop light switch

TCM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
OK

Item/Range
Brake pedal:
Switch ON
ON or OFF
Released:
OFF
OK

OK
OK

Standard Resistance

OK

OK
5. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

DTC Code DTC Name
P0741 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Performance (Shift Solenoid Valve SL)
P2757 Torque Converter Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Performance (Shift Solenoid Valve SLU)
DESCRIPTION
Based on the on and off signals of the shift solenoid valve SL, the TCM controls the fluid pressure to the lock-up relay valve, and turns lock-up on or off.

DTC
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
Shift
solenoid
valve SL
valve SL1, 2, 3, 4 and 5, SR, SLU, SL, speed sensors (SP2, NT), engine coolant valve SLU
temperature sensor, oil temperature sensor, knock control sensor, electronic throttle, or Valve body
P0741 CAN2) assembly
2. During a lock-up request, the engine speed and turbine speed slip amount is 70 rpm or Torque
more converter
3. 2 seconds or more per trip clutch
Automatic
transmission
assembly
Shift
solenoid
valve SL
more converter
Automatic
transmission
assembly
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
Torque converter lock-up is controlled by the TCM based on the speed sensor (NT), engine speed, engine load, engine coolant temperature, vehicle speed,
transmission fluid temperature, and gear selection. The TCM determines the lock-up status of the torque converter by comparing the engine speed (NE) to
the input turbine speed (NT). The TCM calculates the actual transmission gear by comparing the input turbine speed (NT) to the counter gear speed (NC).
When conditions are appropriate, the TCM requests "lock-up" by applying control voltage to shift solenoid SL. When shift solenoid SL is turned on, it applies
pressure to the lock-up relay valve and locks the torque converter clutch.
If the TCM detects no lock-up after lock-up has been requested, the TCM interprets this as a fault in shift solenoid valve SL or SLU. The TCM will turn on
the MIL and store the DTC.
Tech Tips
Example:
When the following condition is met, the system judges it to be a malfunction.
There is a difference in rotation between the input side (engine speed) and output side (input turbine speed) of the torque converter when the TCM
commands lock-up (engine speed is at least 70 rpm more than the input turbine speed).
PROCEDURE
Result

P0741, P2757 and other DTCs are output B
Tech Tips
If a solenoid related or oil pressure switch related DTC is output, troubleshoot those DTCs first.
B GO TO DTC CHART Click here
2. INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL AND SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SLU

a. Check shift solenoid valve SL.
i. Remove shift solenoid valve SL Click here.
table below.
Standard Resistance
Specified
Shift solenoid SL connector - 20°C 11 to 15
Shift solenoid SL body (68°F) Ω

OK
b. Check shift solenoid valve SLU.
i. Remove shift solenoid valve SLU Click here.
table below.
Standard Resistance
Specified
Condition
SLU - Terminal 2 (68°F) Ω

OK
Result

Shift solenoid valve SL and SLU are OK A
Shift solenoid valve SL is NG B
Shift solenoid valve SLU is NG C
B REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL Click here
C REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SLU Click here

OK

NG Click here
OK

OK
OK

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION

DTC
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
Shift
solenoid
valve SL
more converter
Automatic
transmission
assembly
Shift
solenoid
valve SL
more converter
Automatic
transmission
assembly
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
Tech Tips
Example:
PROCEDURE
Result

Tech Tips

table below.
Standard Resistance
Specified

OK
table below.
Standard Resistance
Specified
Condition

OK
Result


OK

NG Click here
OK

OK
OK

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION

DTC
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
Shift
solenoid
valve SL
more converter
Automatic
transmission
assembly
Shift
solenoid
valve SL
more converter
Automatic
transmission
assembly
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
Tech Tips
Example:
PROCEDURE
Result

Tech Tips

table below.
Standard Resistance
Specified

OK
table below.
Standard Resistance
Specified
Condition

OK
Result


OK

NG Click here
OK

OK
OK

DTC Code DTC Name
P0746 Pressure Control Solenoid "A" Performance (Shift Solenoid Valve SL1)
DESCRIPTION
The TCM detects the gear position based on signals from the speed sensors (SP2 and NT).
Based on the detected gear position and oil pressure switch output, the TCM detects related mechanical problems in the shift solenoid valves, valve body
and automatic transmission.
Tech Tips
Actual gear position under SL1 stuck ON malfunction*1 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th
Actual gear position under SL1 stuck OFF malfunction*2 N*3 N*3 N*3 N*3 N*3 6th 7th 8th
*1: When the vehicle is running with the transmission in a gear less than 6th
*2: When the vehicle is running with the transmission in 6th gear or higher
*3: Neutral

DTC Trouble Area
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
Shift
solenoid
valve SL1
Shift
1. ECT is 40°C (104°F) or higher, ATF temperature is -10°C (14°F) or higher, and the solenoid
valve SLT
valve SL1, 2, 3, 4 and 5, SR, speed sensors (NT, NC3, SP2), oil pressure switch, engine Oil pressure
coolant temperature sensor, oil temperature sensor, knock control sensor, electronic switch
P0746 throttle, or CAN2) Valve body
2. When a gear shift to 6th, 7th, or 8th is requested by the TCM, the oil pressure switch is assembly
on Torque
3. Malfunction status is detected 2 times per trip converter
assembly
Automatic
transmission
assembly
DTC Trouble Area
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
Shift
solenoid
valve SL1
Shift
vehicle is driven with the shift lever in D (no malfunctions are detected in shift solenoid valve SLT
2. When gear shifts to 1st to 5th are requested by the TCM, the engine overruns (neutral assembly
status) Torque
3. Malfunction status continues for 0.5 sec. or more converter
assembly
Automatic
transmission
assembly
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
PROCEDURE
Result

Tech Tips

Tech Tips
b. Start the engine, drive at a low speed and perform the inspection.
Result

Vehicle cannot be driven
A
(vehicle changes to neutral)
Vehicle can be driven

B
(vehicle creep occurs)

below.
Standard Resistance
Specified

operating noise.
OK
NG

below.
Standard Resistance
Specified


operating noise.
OK
OK

OK
NG REPAIR OR REPLACE TRANSMISSION VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY

Click here
OK

OK
OK

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION
Tech Tips
*3: Neutral

DTC Trouble Area
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
Shift
solenoid
valve SL1
Shift
valve SLT
on Torque
assembly
Automatic
transmission
assembly
DTC Trouble Area
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
Shift
solenoid
valve SL1
Shift
status) Torque
assembly
Automatic
transmission
assembly
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
PROCEDURE
Result

Tech Tips

Tech Tips
Result

A

B

below.
Standard Resistance
Specified

operating noise.
OK
NG

below.
Standard Resistance
Specified


operating noise.
OK
OK

OK

Click here
OK

OK
OK

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION
Tech Tips
*3: Neutral

DTC Trouble Area
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
Shift
solenoid
valve SL1
Shift
valve SLT
on Torque
assembly
Automatic
transmission
assembly
DTC Trouble Area
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
Shift
solenoid
valve SL1
Shift
status) Torque
assembly
Automatic
transmission
assembly
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
PROCEDURE
Result

Tech Tips

Tech Tips
Result

A

B

below.
Standard Resistance
Specified

operating noise.
OK
NG

below.
Standard Resistance
Specified


operating noise.
OK
OK

OK

Click here
OK

OK
OK

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM, Diagnostic DTC:P0748, P0778, P0798, P2810,
P2819
DTC Code DTC Name
P0748 Pressure Control Solenoid "A" Electrical (Shift Solenoid Valve SL1)
P0778 Pressure Control Solenoid "B" Electrical (Shift Solenoid Valve SL2)
P0798 Pressure Control Solenoid "C" Electrical (Shift Solenoid Valve SL3)
P2810 Pressure Control Solenoid "G" Electrical (Shift Solenoid Valve SL4)
P2819 Pressure Control Solenoid "H" Electrical (Shift Solenoid Valve SL5)
DESCRIPTION
Based on the ON-OFF combinations of the shift solenoid valve SL1, 2, 3, 4 and 5, the TCM performs gear shifts from 1st gear to 8th gear.
If a line related to a solenoid valve is open or shorted, the TCM uses the fail-safe function to turn other solenoid valves ON or OFF. If all solenoid valves are
malfunctioning, only the mechanical fluid pressure circuit will function and the system will change to manual transmission. If an open or short has occurred,
the TCM cuts power to the malfunctioning solenoid valve.

DTC No. 2. Malfunction Status Trouble Area
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
1. Driving so that gear changes occur Shift solenoid valve SL1

2. Solenoid valve SL1 circuit is open or shorted Transmission wire
P0748
3. 1 second Harness and connector

P0778

P0798

P2810

P2819
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
This DTC indicates an open or short in the shift solenoid valve SL1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 circuit. The TCM commands gear shifts by turning the shift solenoid valves
ON/OFF. When there is an open or short circuit in any shift solenoid valve circuit, the TCM detects the problem, illuminates the MIL and stores the DTC.
Also, the TCM performs the fail-safe function and turns the other normal shift solenoid valves ON/OFF. In case of an open or short circuit, the TCM stops
sending the current to the open or short circuited solenoid.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Tech Tips
The shift solenoid valve SL1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 turns ON/OFF normally when the shift lever is on D:
Shift Solenoid Valve Operation:
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK HARNESS AND TRANSMISSION WIRE (TRANSMISSION WIRE - TCM, TRANSMISSION WIRE (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL1, 2, 3, 4
AND 5))
a. Disconnect the E6 and E7 TCM connectors.
b. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.
Standard resistance

Condition
E6-6 (SL1+) - E6-5 (SL1-) Always 5.0 to 5.6 Ω
E6-6 (SL1+) or E6-5 (SL1-) - Body 10 kΩ or
E6-4 (SL2+) - E6-3 (SL2-) - Body Always 10 kΩ or
ground higher
E6-2 (SL3+) - E6-1 (SL3-) - Body 10 kΩ or
E7-7 (SL4+) - E7-6 (SL4-) - Body 10 kΩ or
Always
ground higher
ground higher

NG Click here
OK
2. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

b. Disconnect the E6 and E7 TCM connectors.
Standard resistance
Specified
E50-23 (SL1+) - E6-6 (SL1+) Always Below 1 Ω
E50-24 (SL1-) - E6-5 (SL1-) Always Below 1 Ω
E50-23 (SL1+) or E6-6 (SL1+) - 10 kΩ or
Always
Body ground higher
E50-24 (SL1-) or E6-5 (SL1-) - 10 kΩ or
Always
Body ground higher
E50-28 (SL2+) or E6-4 (SL2+) - Always 10 kΩ or
Body ground higher
E50-29 (SL2-) or E6-3 (SL2-) - 10 kΩ or
E50-25 (SL3+) or E6-2 (SL3+) - 10 kΩ or
Always
Body ground higher
E50-26 (SL3-) or E6-1 (SL3-) - 10 kΩ or
Always
Body ground higher
E50-15 (SL4+) or E7-7 (SL4+) - 10 kΩ or
Always
Body ground higher
E50-16 (SL4-) or E7-6 (SL4-) - Always 10 kΩ or
Body ground higher
E50-5 (SL5+) or E7-5 (SL5+) - 10 kΩ or
E50-6 (SL5-) or E7-4 (SL5-) - Body 10 kΩ or
Always
ground higher
OK
4. INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL1, 2, 3, 4 AND 5

a. Remove the shift solenoid valves Click here.
b. Measure the resistance of the shift solenoid valves.
Standard resistance
Specified
Condition
Terminal 1 of the shift solenoid valve 20°C 5.0 to 5.6
SL1 - terminal 2 (68°F) Ω


operating noise.
OK
NG REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE Click here
OK

P2819
DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION

3. Malfunction Time
4. Other

P0748

P0778

P0798

P2810

P2819
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
WIRING DIAGRAM
Tech Tips
PROCEDURE
AND 5))
Standard resistance

Condition
ground higher
E6-2 (SL3+) - E6-1 (SL3-) - Body 10 kΩ or
E7-7 (SL4+) - E7-6 (SL4-) - Body 10 kΩ or
Always
ground higher
ground higher

NG Click here
OK
2. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

Standard resistance
Specified
E50-23 (SL1+) or E6-6 (SL1+) - 10 kΩ or
Always
Body ground higher
E50-24 (SL1-) or E6-5 (SL1-) - 10 kΩ or
Always
Body ground higher
Body ground higher
E50-29 (SL2-) or E6-3 (SL2-) - 10 kΩ or
E50-25 (SL3+) or E6-2 (SL3+) - 10 kΩ or
Always
Body ground higher
E50-26 (SL3-) or E6-1 (SL3-) - 10 kΩ or
Always
Body ground higher
E50-15 (SL4+) or E7-7 (SL4+) - 10 kΩ or
Always
Body ground higher
Body ground higher
E50-5 (SL5+) or E7-5 (SL5+) - 10 kΩ or
Always
ground higher
OK

Standard resistance
Specified
Condition


operating noise.
OK
OK

P2819
DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION

3. Malfunction Time
4. Other

P0748

P0778

P0798

P2810

P2819
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
WIRING DIAGRAM
Tech Tips
PROCEDURE
AND 5))
Standard resistance

Condition
ground higher
E6-2 (SL3+) - E6-1 (SL3-) - Body 10 kΩ or
E7-7 (SL4+) - E7-6 (SL4-) - Body 10 kΩ or
Always
ground higher
ground higher

NG Click here
OK
2. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

Standard resistance
Specified
E50-23 (SL1+) or E6-6 (SL1+) - 10 kΩ or
Always
Body ground higher
E50-24 (SL1-) or E6-5 (SL1-) - 10 kΩ or
Always
Body ground higher
Body ground higher
E50-29 (SL2-) or E6-3 (SL2-) - 10 kΩ or
E50-25 (SL3+) or E6-2 (SL3+) - 10 kΩ or
Always
Body ground higher
E50-26 (SL3-) or E6-1 (SL3-) - 10 kΩ or
Always
Body ground higher
E50-15 (SL4+) or E7-7 (SL4+) - 10 kΩ or
Always
Body ground higher
Body ground higher
E50-5 (SL5+) or E7-5 (SL5+) - 10 kΩ or
Always
ground higher
OK

Standard resistance
Specified
Condition


operating noise.
OK
OK

DTC Code DTC Name
P0873 Transmission Fluid Pressure Sensor / Switch "C" Circuit High
DESCRIPTION
The oil pressure switch, which is built into the valve body, detects the fluid pressure of the SL1 fluid pressure circuit. If shift solenoid valve SL1 is stuck on,
P0873 is output.

DTC
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
Shift
solenoid
valve SL1
Oil pressure
switch
Transmission
1. ECT is 40°C (104°F) or higher, ATF temperature is -10°C (14°F) or higher, and the wire
vehicle is driven with the shift lever in D (no malfunctions are detected in shift solenoid Harness or
valve SL1, 2, 3, 4 and 5, SR, speed sensors (NT, NC3, SP2), engine coolant temperature connector
P0873 sensor, oil temperature sensor, knock control sensor, electronic throttle, or CAN2) TCM
2. When the actual gear is 6th to 8th gear, the oil pressure switch is on Valve body
3. Malfunction status occurs 2 times (1 trip) assembly
4. 2 trip detection logic Torque
converter
clutch
assembly
Automatic
transmission
assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
Result

Tech Tips
2. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CIRCUIT

a. Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table
below.
Standard Resistance

E6-25 (TPS1) - Body ground Always 10 kΩ or higher
Tech Tips
Do not disconnect the connectors of the TCM.
NG READ VALUE USING DATA LIST (TPS 1 SW SIGNAL) Click here
OK

below.
Standard Resistance
Specified

operating noise.
OK

OK

OK

NG Click here
OK

OK
OK

6. READ VALUE USING DATA LIST (TPS 1 SW SIGNAL)
Tech Tips
Before connecting the terminals, do visual and contact pressure checks on
the TCM connectors.
c. Turn the engine switch on (IG).
d. Turn the intelligent tester on.
e. Enter the following menus: Powertrain / ECT / Data List.
f. Read the value displayed on the intelligent tester.
Result

TPS 1 Switch OFF A
TPS 1 Switch ON B

B
Click here
7. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

below.
Standard Resistance
Specified
Body ground higher
OK

below.
Standard Resistance

Condition
Oil pressure switch connector - 17 Below 1
(TPS1) Always Ω
Always
(TPS1) - Body ground higher
OK

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION
P0873 is output.

DTC
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
Shift
solenoid
valve SL1
Oil pressure
switch
Transmission
converter
clutch
assembly
Automatic
transmission
assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
Result

Tech Tips

below.
Standard Resistance

Tech Tips
OK

below.
Standard Resistance
Specified

operating noise.
OK

OK

OK

NG Click here
OK

OK
OK

Tech Tips
the TCM connectors.
Result

TPS 1 Switch OFF A
TPS 1 Switch ON B

B
Click here
7. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

below.
Standard Resistance
Specified
Body ground higher
OK

below.
Standard Resistance

Condition
(TPS1) Always Ω
Always
OK

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION
P0873 is output.

DTC
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
Shift
solenoid
valve SL1
Oil pressure
switch
Transmission
converter
clutch
assembly
Automatic
transmission
assembly
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
Result

Tech Tips

below.
Standard Resistance

Tech Tips
OK

below.
Standard Resistance
Specified

operating noise.
OK

OK

OK

NG Click here
OK

OK
OK

Tech Tips
the TCM connectors.
Result

TPS 1 Switch OFF A
TPS 1 Switch ON B

B
Click here
7. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

below.
Standard Resistance
Specified
Body ground higher
OK

below.
Standard Resistance

Condition
(TPS1) Always Ω
Always
OK

DTC Code DTC Name
P0985 Shift Solenoid "E" Control Circuit Low (Shift Solenoid Valve SR)
P0986 Shift Solenoid "E" Control Circuit High (Shift Solenoid Valve SR)
DESCRIPTION
Based on the ON-OFF combinations of the SL1, 2, 3, 4 and 5, SLT, SLU, SL and SR solenoids, the TCM performs gear shifts from 1st gear to 8th gear. If a
line related to a solenoid valve is open or shorted, the TCM uses the fail-safe function to turn other solenoid valves ON or OFF. If all solenoid valves are

No.
Shift solenoid
valve SR
Transmission
P0985 TCM detects short in solenoid valve SR circuit 2 times when solenoid valve SR is operated
wire
Harness and
connector
TCM
Shift solenoid
valve SR
Transmission
TCM detects open in solenoid valve SR circuit 2 times when solenoid valve SR is operated wire
P0986 (1 trip detection logic)
Harness and
connector
TCM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
These DTCs indicate an open or short in the shift solenoid valve SR circuit. When there is an open or short circuit in any shift solenoid valve circuit, the TCM
detects the problem, illuminates the MIL and stores the DTC. When the shift solenoid valve SR is ON, if resistance is 8 Ω or less, the TCM determines there
is a short in the shift solenoid valve SR circuit.
When the shift solenoid valve SR is OFF, if resistance is 100 kΩ or more, the TCM determines there is an open in the shift solenoid valve SR circuit Click
here.
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK HARNESS AND TRANSMISSION WIRE (TRANSMISSION WIRE - TCM, TRANSMISSION WIRE (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SR))
Standard resistance

E7-17 (SR) - Body ground Always 11 to 15 Ω

Click here
OK
2. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

Standard resistance

Condition
E50-18 (SR) - E7-17 (SR) Always Below 1 Ω
E50-18 (SR) or E7-17 (SR) - Body 10 kΩ or
OK

a. Remove the shift solenoid valve SR Click here.
b. Measure the resistance of the shift solenoid valve.
Standard resistance
Specified
Condition
Shift solenoid valve SR connector - 20°C 11 to 15
Shift solenoid valve SR body (68°F) Ω

noise.
OK
NG REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SR Click here
OK

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION

No.
Shift solenoid
valve SR
Transmission
wire
Harness and
connector
TCM
Shift solenoid
valve SR
Transmission
Harness and
connector
TCM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
here.
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
Standard resistance


Click here
OK
2. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

Standard resistance

Condition
OK

Standard resistance
Specified
Condition

noise.
OK
OK

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION

No.
Shift solenoid
valve SR
Transmission
wire
Harness and
connector
TCM
Shift solenoid
valve SR
Transmission
Harness and
connector
TCM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
here.
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
Standard resistance


Click here
OK
2. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

Standard resistance

Condition
OK

Standard resistance
Specified
Condition

noise.
OK
OK

DTC Code DTC Name
P2714 Pressure Control Solenoid "D" Performance (Shift Solenoid Valve SLT)
DESCRIPTION
Based on signals from the accelerator position sensor and speed sensors (NC3, SP2 and NT), the TCM controls the solenoid valve (SLT) using a
predetermined the current. As a result, the line pressure is adjusted to a pressure that is appropriate for the throttle angle and engine output. Based on the
rotation speed indicated by the transmission speed sensors (NT, NC3 and SP2), the TCM calculates the heat level of the friction material, and detects the
slip condition of the clutch, etc.

DTC 1. Diagnosis Condition Trouble Area
3. Other
3. Other
Shift
solenoid
valve SL1
Shift
solenoid
valve SL2
Shift
solenoid
valve SL3
valve SL1, 2, 3, 4 and 5, SR, SLT, speed sensors (NT, NC3, SP2), engine coolant valve SL4
temperature sensor, oil temperature sensor, knock control sensor, electronic throttle, or Shift
P2714 CAN2) solenoid
2. - Engine overruns at an engine torque that is above the set engine torque of each gear valve SL5
- Clutch is judged to be slipping, and the friction material is overheated beyond the Shift
specified threshold solenoid
3. 2 trip detection logic valve SLT
Valve body
assembly
Torque
converter
clutch
assembly
Automatic
transmission
assembly
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The TCM calculates the amount of heat absorbed by the friction material based on the difference in revolution (clutch slippage) between the turbine and
output shaft. The TCM illuminates the MIL and stores this DTC when the amount of heat absorption exceeds the specified value.
When shift solenoid valve SLT remains on, oil pressure goes down and clutch engagement force decreases.
Note
If you continue driving under these conditions, the clutch will burn out and the vehicle will no longer be drivable.
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK DTC OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO DTC P0746, P0771, P0776, P0796, P2714, P2808 AND P2817)
Result

to
P2714 and one or more of the following DTCs are
output: P0746, P0771, P0776, P0796, P2808, P2817 A

P0746, P0771, P0776, P0796, P2714, P2808 or
P2817 and other DTCs are output C
Tech Tips
If any other codes besides P0746, P0771, P0776, P0796, P2714, P2808 and P2817 are output, perform troubleshooting for those DTCs
first.
2. CHECK FOR OUTPUT DTCS OTHER THAN P2714

a. Check if DTCs other than P2714 are output.
Result

P2714 and P0746 are output A
P2714, P0771 and P0776 are output
B
P2714 and P0776 are output

P2714 and P0796 are output C
P2714 and P2808 are output D
P2714 and P2817 are output E
C GO TO DTC P0796 FLOWCHART Click here
D GO TO DTC P2808 FLOWCHART Click here
E GO TO DTC P2817 FLOWCHART Click here
GO TO DTC P0746 FLOWCHART Click here

below.
Standard Resistance
Specified

operating noise.
OK
OK

OK

Click here
OK

OK
OK

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION

3. Other
3. Other
Shift
solenoid
valve SL1
Shift
solenoid
valve SL2
Shift
solenoid
valve SL3
Valve body
assembly
Torque
converter
clutch
assembly
Automatic
transmission
assembly
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
Note
PROCEDURE
Result

to
output: P0746, P0771, P0776, P0796, P2808, P2817 A

P0746, P0771, P0776, P0796, P2714, P2808 or
Tech Tips
first.

Result

B


below.
Standard Resistance
Specified

operating noise.
OK
OK

OK

Click here
OK

OK
OK

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION

3. Other
3. Other
Shift
solenoid
valve SL1
Shift
solenoid
valve SL2
Shift
solenoid
valve SL3
Valve body
assembly
Torque
converter
clutch
assembly
Automatic
transmission
assembly
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
Note
PROCEDURE
Result

to
output: P0746, P0771, P0776, P0796, P2808, P2817 A

P0746, P0771, P0776, P0796, P2714, P2808 or
Tech Tips
first.

Result

B


below.
Standard Resistance
Specified

operating noise.
OK
OK

OK

Click here
OK

OK
OK

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION

3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
1. Engine is running Shift solenoid valve SLT

2. Solenoid valve SLT circuit is open or shorted Transmission wire
P2716
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
When an open or short in the shift solenoid valve SLT circuit is detected, the TCM interprets this as a fault. The TCM will turn on the MIL and store the
DTC.
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK HARNESS AND TRANSMISSION WIRE (TRANSMISSION WIRE - TCM, TRANSMISSION WIRE (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SLT))
Standard resistance
Specified
E7-3 (SLT+) - E7-2 (SLT-) Always 5.0 to 5.6 Ω
E7-3 (SLT+) or E7-2 (SLT-) - Body Always 10 kΩ or
ground higher

Click here
OK
2. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

Standard resistance
Specified
E50-3 (SLT+) - E7-3 (SLT+) Always Below 1 Ω
E50-4 (SLT-) - E7-2 (SLT-) Always Below 1 Ω
E50-3 (SLT+) or E7-3 (SLT+) - 10 kΩ or
E50-4 (SLT-) or E7-2 (SLT-) - Body Always 10 kΩ or
ground higher

OK

a. Remove the shift solenoid valve SLT Click here.
Standard resistance
Specified
SLT - terminal 2 (68°F) Ω

operating noise.
OK
OK

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION

3. Malfunction Time
4. Other

P2716
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
DTC.
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
Standard resistance
Specified
ground higher

Click here
OK
2. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

Standard resistance
Specified
E50-3 (SLT+) or E7-3 (SLT+) - 10 kΩ or
ground higher

OK

Standard resistance
Specified

operating noise.
OK
OK

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION

3. Malfunction Time
4. Other

P2716
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
DTC.
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
Standard resistance
Specified
ground higher

Click here
OK
2. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

Standard resistance
Specified
E50-3 (SLT+) or E7-3 (SLT+) - 10 kΩ or
ground higher

OK

Standard resistance
Specified

operating noise.
OK
OK

DTC Code DTC Name
P2759 Torque Converter Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Control Circuit Electrical (Shift Solenoid Valve SLU)
DESCRIPTION
The TCM controls the lock-up solenoid using a predetermined the current, and performs lock-up and flex lock-up control.

3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
1. Engine is running Shift solenoid valve SLU

2. Solenoid valve SLU circuit is open or shorted Transmission wire
P2759
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
When an open or short in a shift solenoid valve SLU circuit is detected, the TCM determines that there is a malfunction. The TCM will illuminate the MIL and
store this DTC.
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK HARNESS AND TRANSMISSION WIRE (TRANSMISSION WIRE - TCM, TRANSMISSION WIRE (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SLU))
Standard resistance
Specified
E7-1 (SLU+) - E7-8 (SLU-) Always 5.0 to 5.6 Ω
E7-1 (SLU+) or E7-8 (SLU-) - Body 10 kΩ or

NG Click here
OK
2. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

Standard resistance

Condition
E50-13 (SLU+) - E7-1 (SLU+) Always Below 1 Ω
E50-14 (SLU-) - E7-8 (SLU-) Always Below 1 Ω
E50-13 (SLU+) or E7-1 (SLU+) - 10 kΩ or
E50-14 (SLU-) or E7-8 (SLU-) - Always 10 kΩ or
Body ground higher
OK
4. INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SLU

a. Remove the shift solenoid valve SLU Click here.
Standard resistance
Specified
SLU - terminal 2 (68°F) Ω

operating noise.
OK
NG REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SLU Click here
OK

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION

3. Malfunction Time
4. Other

P2759
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
store this DTC.
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
Standard resistance
Specified

NG Click here
OK
2. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

Standard resistance

Condition
E50-13 (SLU+) or E7-1 (SLU+) - 10 kΩ or
Body ground higher
OK

Standard resistance
Specified

operating noise.
OK
OK

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION

3. Malfunction Time
4. Other

P2759
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
store this DTC.
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
Standard resistance
Specified

NG Click here
OK
2. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

Standard resistance

Condition
E50-13 (SLU+) or E7-1 (SLU+) - 10 kΩ or
Body ground higher
OK

Standard resistance
Specified

operating noise.
OK
OK

DTC Code DTC Name
P2765 Input / Turbine Speed Sensor "B" Circuit
P2767 Input / Turbine Speed Sensor "B" Circuit No Signal
DESCRIPTION
The speed sensor (NC3) detects the automatic transmission's No. 3 clutch drum rotation speed.

DTC Trouble Area
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
Speed
1. With PNP switch and speed sensor (NC3) in normal condition, output shaft speed is 1000 sensor (NC3)
rpm or more (when changing to 7th gear, output shaft speed is 1400 rpm or more) Transmission
P2765 2. Speed sensor (NC3) output voltage is less than 0.1 V, or 1.9 V or more wire
connector
TCM
Speed
P2767 2. Speed sensor (NC3) sensor value is less than 300 rpm wire
TCM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
Also, while the vehicle is operating in 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th or 7th gear with the shift lever in D, if the input shaft speed is less than 300 rpm*1 although the
output shaft speed is more than 1,000 rpm*2, the TCM interprets this as a fault, illuminates the MIL and stores the DTC.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Tech Tips
Note
TCM:

Display Item/Range
No. 3 clutch drum speed/ 0 rpm: 2nd or 8th gear

Data is displayed in increments of 50
SPD (NC3) Min.: 0 rpm above 0 rpm: 1st, or 3rd to 7th rpm
Max.: 12750 rpm gear
Tech Tips
SPD (NC3) is always 0 while driving: Open or short in the sensor or circuit.
SPD (NC3) is always more than 0 and less than 300 rpm while driving the vehicle at 50 km/h (31 mph) or more: Sensor trouble, improper
PROCEDURE
Standard voltage

Condition

Standard resistance
Specified
E50-12 (NC3O) - Body Always 100 Ω
ground

NG Click here
OK

Standard resistance
Specified
Terminal 1 of the speed sensor (NC3) Always Below 1
connector or 11 (NC3B) - Body ground Always higher
Always
OK

Standard resistance
Specified
Condition
E50-11 (NC3B) or E7-28 (NC3B) - Always 10 kΩ or
Body ground higher
E50-12 (NC3O) or E7-22 (NC3O) - 10 kΩ or
OK
4. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION

DTC Trouble Area
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
Speed
connector
TCM
Speed
TCM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
WIRING DIAGRAM
Tech Tips
Note
TCM:

Display Item/Range

Tech Tips
PROCEDURE
Standard voltage

Condition

Standard resistance
Specified
ground

NG Click here
OK

Standard resistance
Specified
Always
OK

Standard resistance
Specified
Condition
Body ground higher
E50-12 (NC3O) or E7-22 (NC3O) - 10 kΩ or
OK
4. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION

DTC Trouble Area
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
Speed
connector
TCM
Speed
TCM
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
WIRING DIAGRAM
Tech Tips
Note
TCM:

Display Item/Range

Tech Tips
PROCEDURE
Standard voltage

Condition

Standard resistance
Specified
ground

NG Click here
OK

Standard resistance
Specified
Always
OK

Standard resistance
Specified
Condition
Body ground higher
E50-12 (NC3O) or E7-22 (NC3O) - 10 kΩ or
OK
4. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

DTC Code DTC Name
P2769 Short in Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Circuit (Shift Solenoid Valve SL)
P2770 Open in Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Circuit (Shift Solenoid Valve SL)
DESCRIPTION
Based on the ON/OFF condition of solenoid valve SL, the TCM controls the fluid pressure to the lock-up relay valve, and performs lock-up control.

No.
Shift solenoid valve

SL
TCM detects short in solenoid valve SL circuit 2 times when solenoid valve SL is Transmission wire
P2769 operated
(2 trip detection logic) Harness and
connector
TCM

SL
TCM detects open in solenoid valve SL circuit 2 times when solenoid valve SL is Transmission wire
P2770 operated
connector
TCM
Fail-safe function:
If the TCM detects a malfunction, it turns the shift solenoid valve SL OFF.
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
Based on the signals from the throttle position sensor, the air flow meter and the crankshaft position sensor, the TCM sends a signal to the solenoid valve
SL to regulate the hydraulic pressure and provide smoother torque converter clutch engagement. The shift solenoid valve SL responds to commands from
the TCM. The valve controls the lock-up relay valve to perform the torque-converter lock-up function. If the TCM detects an open or short circuit for shift
solenoid valve SL, it will illuminate the MIL.
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK HARNESS AND TRANSMISSION WIRE (TRANSMISSION WIRE - TCM, TRANSMISSION WIRE (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL))
Standard resistance

E6-7 (SL) - Body ground Always 11 to 15 Ω

Click here
OK
2. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

Standard resistance

Condition
E50-7 (SL) - E6-7 (SL) Always Below 1 Ω
E50-7 (SL) or E6-7 (SL) - Body Always 10 kΩ or
ground higher
OK
4. INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL

a. Remove the shift solenoid valve SL Click here.
Standard resistance
Specified
Condition
Shift solenoid valve SL connector - 20°C 11 to 15
Shift solenoid valve SL Body (68°F) Ω

noise.
OK
NG REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL Click here
OK

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION

No.

SL
P2769 operated
connector
TCM

SL
P2770 operated
connector
TCM
Fail-safe function:
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
Standard resistance


Click here
OK
2. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

Standard resistance

Condition
ground higher
OK

Standard resistance
Specified
Condition

noise.
OK
OK

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION

No.

SL
P2769 operated
connector
TCM

SL
P2770 operated
connector
TCM
Fail-safe function:
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
Standard resistance


Click here
OK
2. REPLACE TCM
NEXT

Standard resistance

Condition
ground higher
OK

Standard resistance
Specified
Condition

noise.
OK
OK

DTC Code DTC Name
P2808 Pressure Control Solenoid "G" Performance (Shift Solenoid Valve SL4)
DESCRIPTION
Based on signals from the transmission speed sensors (NT and NC), the gear position is detected. If the detected gear position is different than the
commanded gear position, the TCM detects related mechanical problems in the shift solenoid valves, valve body and automatic transmission.
Tech Tips
Actual gear position under SL4 stuck ON malfunction 4th 4th 3rd 4th 6th 6th 7th 6th
Actual gear position under SL4 stuck OFF malfunction 1st 2nd 3rd N (1st)* 5th N* 7th 8th
*: Neutral

DTC
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
valve SL1, 2, 3, 4 and 5, SR, speed sensors (NT, NC3, SP2), engine coolant temperature Shift
sensor, oil temperature sensor, knock control sensor, electronic throttle, or CAN2) solenoid
2. One of the following occurs: valve SL4
1. When gear shifts to 1st are requested by the TCM, the actual gear changes to 4th Valve body
gear assembly
Torque
P2808 2. When gear shifts to 2nd are requested by the TCM, the actual gear changes to converter
4th gear clutch
gear Automatic
4. When gear shifts to 8th are requested by the TCM, the actual gear changes to 6th transmission
gear assembly
3. Malfunction status occurs 2 times (1 trip)

Shift
solenoid
valve SL4
P2808 2. When gear shifts to 4th or 6th are requested by the TCM, the engine overruns (neutral assembly
status) Torque
clutch
Automatic
transmission
assembly
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
PROCEDURE
Result

P0796, P2714, P2808, and other DTCs are output D
Tech Tips

Tech Tips
Result


below.
Standard Resistance
Specified

operating noise.
OK

below.
Standard Resistance
Specified

operating noise.
OK
OK

OK

Click here
OK

OK
OK

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION
Tech Tips
*: Neutral

DTC
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
gear assembly
Torque
4th gear clutch
gear Automatic
gear assembly

Shift
solenoid
valve SL4
status) Torque
clutch
Automatic
transmission
assembly
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
PROCEDURE
Result

Tech Tips

Tech Tips
Result


below.
Standard Resistance
Specified

operating noise.
OK

below.
Standard Resistance
Specified

operating noise.
OK
OK

OK

Click here
OK

OK
OK

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION
Tech Tips
*: Neutral

DTC
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
gear assembly
Torque
4th gear clutch
gear Automatic
gear assembly

Shift
solenoid
valve SL4
status) Torque
clutch
Automatic
transmission
assembly
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
PROCEDURE
Result

Tech Tips

Tech Tips
Result


below.
Standard Resistance
Specified

operating noise.
OK

below.
Standard Resistance
Specified

operating noise.
OK
OK

OK

Click here
OK

OK
OK

DTC Code DTC Name
P2817 Pressure Control Solenoid "H" Performance or Stuck OFF (Shift Solenoid Valve SL5)
DESCRIPTION
Tech Tips
Actual gear position under SL5 stuck ON malfunction 2nd 2nd 3rd 4th 8th 6th 7th 8th
Actual gear position under SL5 stuck OFF malfunction 1st N (1st)* 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th N*
*: Neutral

DTC
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
2. One of the following occurs: assembly
P2817 1. When gear shifts to 1st are requested by the TCM, the actual gear changes to 2nd Torque
gear converter
clutch
gear Automatic
3. Malfunction status occurs once per trip transmission
Shift
solenoid
valve SL5
P2817 2. When gear shifts to 2nd or 8th are requested by the TCM, the engine overruns (neutral assembly
status) Torque
clutch
Automatic
transmission
assembly
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
PROCEDURE
Result

P2714, P2817, and other DTCs are output C
Tech Tips

Tech Tips
Result


below.
Standard Resistance
Specified

operating noise.
OK

below.
Standard Resistance
Specified

operating noise.
OK
OK

OK

Click here
OK

OK
OK

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION
Tech Tips
*: Neutral

DTC
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
gear converter
clutch
gear Automatic
Shift
solenoid
valve SL5
status) Torque
clutch
Automatic
transmission
assembly
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
PROCEDURE
Result

Tech Tips

Tech Tips
Result


below.
Standard Resistance
Specified

operating noise.
OK

below.
Standard Resistance
Specified

operating noise.
OK
OK

OK

Click here
OK

OK
OK

DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION
Tech Tips
*: Neutral

DTC
3. Malfunction Time
4. Other
gear converter
clutch
gear Automatic
Shift
solenoid
valve SL5
status) Torque
clutch
Automatic
transmission
assembly
MONITOR DESCRIPTION
PROCEDURE
Result

Tech Tips

Tech Tips
Result


below.
Standard Resistance
Specified

operating noise.
OK

below.
Standard Resistance
Specified

operating noise.
OK
OK

OK

Click here
OK

OK
OK

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM, Diagnostic DTC:U0100
DTC Code DTC Name
U0100 Lost Communication with ECM / PCM "A"
DESCRIPTION
The ECM communicates with the TCM using the Controller Area Network (CAN).
If there is a problem in this communication, the TCM stores the DTC.
DTC Code DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area
Following conditions are met for 1.25 seconds (1 trip detection logic):
Engine switch is on (IG)
U0100 ECM
Battery voltage is 10.5 V or higher
TCM
No communication between the ECM and TCM
WIRING DIAGRAM
Tech Tips
If CAN communication is malfunctioning, the TCM cannot receive the current data from the ECM. In this case, the freeze frame data output from
the TCM is not updated, so the data will not be useful for the inspection. However, reading the Data List as the first step in troubleshooting is an
effective way to find malfunctions.
The malfunctioning area can be checked using the CAN Bus Check function of the intelligent tester.
for LHD: Refer to the following procedures Click here.
for RHD: Refer to the following procedures Click here.
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK DTC OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO DTC U0100)
Result

Only U0100 is output A
U0100 and other DTCs are output B
Tech Tips
If any other codes besides U0100 are output, perform troubleshooting for those DTCs first.
2. CHECK TCM (POWER SOURCE, BODY GROUND)

Standard Voltage

Condition
A12-6 (+B) - E5-7 Engine switch on
(E1) (IG) 11 to 14 V

below.
Standard Resistance

REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR (TCM - BATTERY,

NG BODY GROUND)
OK
3. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (ECM - TCM)

a. Disconnect the A13 ECM connector.
below.
Standard Resistance
Condition
A13-10 (CAN+) - A12-18 (CAN+) Always Below 1 Ω
A13-9 (CAN-) - A12-28 (CAN-) Always Below 1 Ω
A13-10 (CAN+) or A12-18 (CAN+) - 10 kΩ or
A13-9 (CAN-) or A12-28 (CAN-) - Always 10 kΩ or
Body ground higher
OK
4. CHECK IF DTC RECURS

b. Replace the TCM Click here.
Tech Tips
Replace the TCM with the TCM of a normally functioning vehicle of the same model.
c. Start the engine.
d. Read the DTCs.
Result

No DTC A
U0100 is output (for 1UR-FSE) B
U0100 is output (for 1UR-FE) C
B REPLACE ECM Click here
C REPLACE ECM Click here
5. REPLACE TCM
NEXT
DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION
U0100 ECM
TCM
WIRING DIAGRAM
Tech Tips
PROCEDURE
Result

Tech Tips

Standard Voltage

Condition
(E1) (IG) 11 to 14 V

below.
Standard Resistance


NG BODY GROUND)
OK

below.
Standard Resistance
Condition
A13-10 (CAN+) or A12-18 (CAN+) - 10 kΩ or
Body ground higher
OK

Tech Tips
d. Read the DTCs.
Result

No DTC A
5. REPLACE TCM
NEXT
DTC Code DTC Name
DESCRIPTION
U0100 ECM
TCM
WIRING DIAGRAM
Tech Tips
PROCEDURE
Result

Tech Tips

Standard Voltage

Condition
(E1) (IG) 11 to 14 V

below.
Standard Resistance


NG BODY GROUND)
OK

below.
Standard Resistance
Condition
A13-10 (CAN+) or A12-18 (CAN+) - 10 kΩ or
Body ground higher
OK

Tech Tips
d. Read the DTCs.
Result

No DTC A
5. REPLACE TCM
NEXT
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM Transmission Control Switch Circuit
DESCRIPTION
After moving the shift lever to M*1 or S*2, it is possible to switch the shift range between "1" and "8" using the transmission control switch.
Moving the shift lever to "+" once raises the shift range by one, and moving the shift lever to "-" lowers the shift range by one.
Tech Tips
Depending on the specifications of the vehicle, the shift lever will have an "S" or "M" position. The following inspection procedure refers to this position
as the "S" shift lever position.
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
1. INSPECT TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH
a. Disconnect the L42 transmission control switch connector.
below.
Standard Resistance
Tester Specified
Connection Condition Condition
3 (IG) - 7 (S) Shift lever in S, "+" or "- Below 1 Ω

"
2 (SFTU) - 5 Shift lever held in "+"
(E) Below 1 Ω
(Up-shift)
1 (SFTD) - 5 Shift lever held in "-"

(E) Below 1 Ω
(Down-shift)
3 (IG) - 7 (S) Shift lever not in S, "+" 10 kΩ or higher

or "-"
2 (SFTU) - 5 Shift lever in S 10 kΩ or higher
(E)
1 (SFTD) - 5
(E) Shift lever in S 10 kΩ or higher
NG REPLACE TRANSMISSION FLOOR SHIFT ASSEMBLY (TRANSMISSION

CONTROL SWITCH) Click here
OK
2. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH - BATTERY, BODY GROUND)
Standard Voltage

Condition
L42-3 (IG) - Body Engine switch on
L42-3 (IG) - Body Engine switch off Below 1 V

ground

below.
Standard Resistance

L42-5 (E) - Body ground Always Below 1 Ω
OK
3. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH - ECM)

Standard Voltage
Condition
Engine switch on
A13-16 (S) - Body (IG)
ground 11 to 14 V
Shift lever in S, "+"
or "-"
Engine switch on
A13-16 (S) - Body (IG)
Below 1 V
ground Shift lever not in S,
"+" or "-"
c. Turn the engine switch off.

d. Disconnect the A13 ECM connector.
e. w/ Shift Paddle Switch:
Disconnect the transmission shift switch assembly (shift paddle
switch) connector.
f. Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table
below.
Standard Resistance

Condition
Shift lever held in
A13-8 (SFTU) - Body "+" Below 1 Ω
ground
(Up-shift)
Shift lever held in

A13-7 (SFTD) - Body "-"
ground Below 1 Ω
(Down-shift)
A13-8 (SFTU) - Body Shift lever in S 10 kΩ or higher
ground
A13-7 (SFTD) - Body
ground Shift lever in S 10 kΩ or higher
OK
PROCEED TO NEXT SUSPECTED AREA SHOWN IN PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE

Click here
DESCRIPTION
Tech Tips
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
below.
Standard Resistance
Tester Specified

"
(E) Below 1 Ω
(Up-shift)

(E) Below 1 Ω
(Down-shift)

or "-"
(E)
1 (SFTD) - 5

OK
Standard Voltage

Condition

ground

below.
Standard Resistance

OK

Standard Voltage
Condition
Engine switch on
A13-16 (S) - Body (IG)
ground 11 to 14 V
or "-"
Engine switch on
A13-16 (S) - Body (IG)
Below 1 V
"+" or "-"

switch) connector.
below.
Standard Resistance

Condition
Shift lever held in
ground
(Up-shift)
Shift lever held in

A13-7 (SFTD) - Body "-"
ground Below 1 Ω
(Down-shift)
ground
A13-7 (SFTD) - Body
OK

Click here
DESCRIPTION
Tech Tips
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
below.
Standard Resistance
Tester Specified

"
(E) Below 1 Ω
(Up-shift)

(E) Below 1 Ω
(Down-shift)

or "-"
(E)
1 (SFTD) - 5

OK
Standard Voltage

Condition

ground

below.
Standard Resistance

OK

Standard Voltage
Condition
Engine switch on
A13-16 (S) - Body (IG)
ground 11 to 14 V
or "-"
Engine switch on
A13-16 (S) - Body (IG)
Below 1 V
"+" or "-"

switch) connector.
below.
Standard Resistance

Condition
Shift lever held in
ground
(Up-shift)
Shift lever held in

A13-7 (SFTD) - Body "-"
ground Below 1 Ω
(Down-shift)
ground
A13-7 (SFTD) - Body
OK

Click here
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM Shift Paddle Switch Circuit
DESCRIPTION
When the shift lever is in M, the shift range can be changed using the shift paddle switches. It is also possible to select the shift range when the vehicle is
being driven with the shift lever in D by operating the shift paddle switches.
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (SPIRAL CABLE - BODY GROUND)
a. Disconnect the spiral cable connector.
below.
Standard Resistance

L110-2 (ECC) - Body ground Always Below 1 Ω
Text in Illustration
Front view of wire harness connector

*a
(to Spiral Cable Sub-assembly)
OK
2. INSPECT SPIRAL CABLE SUB-ASSEMBLY

a. Remove the spiral cable sub-assembly Click here.
b. Set the spiral cable to the center position.
below.
i. After setting the spiral cable to the center position, rotate
the spiral cable 2.5 times clockwise and measure the
resistance. Then rotate the spiral cable 2.5 times
counterclockwise and measure the resistance.
ii. After setting the spiral cable to the center position, rotate
the spiral cable 2.5 times clockwise. Then while rotating the
spiral cable 5 times counterclockwise, measure the
resistance.
Standard Resistance
Specified
z15-10 (SUP) - L110-5 Always Below 1 Ω
(SUP)
z15-4 (SDN) - L110-12
(SDN) Always Below 1 Ω
z15-7 (ECC) - L110-2 Always Below 1 Ω

(ECC)
Note
As the spiral cable may break, do not rotate the spiral cable more
than the specified amount.
Component without harness connected

*a
(Spiral Cable Sub-assembly)
NG REPLACE SPIRAL CABLE SUB-ASSEMBLY Click here
OK
3. INSPECT TRANSMISSION SHIFT SWITCH ASSEMBLY (RH (+))

a. Remove the transmission shift switch RH Click here.
below.
Standard Resistance
Tester Specified
Connection Switch Condition Condition
SUP - ECC "+" shift paddle operated and Below 2.5 Ω

held (up-shift)
"+" shift paddle not operated 1 MΩ or
SUP - ECC (up-shift) higher Text in Illustration

*a
(Transmission Shift Switch Assembly (RH (+)))
REPLACE TRANSMISSION SHIFT SWITCH ASSEMBLY (RH (+))
NG Click here
OK
4. INSPECT TRANSMISSION SHIFT SWITCH ASSEMBLY (LH (-))

a. Remove the transmission shift switch LH Click here.
below.
Standard Resistance
Tester Switch Condition Specified

"-" shift paddle operated and
SDN - ECC held (down-shift) Below 2.5 Ω
SDN - ECC "-" shift paddle not operated 1 MΩ or

(down-shift) higher Text in Illustration

*a
(Transmission Shift Switch Assembly (LH (-)))
NG REPLACE TRANSMISSION SHIFT SWITCH ASSEMBLY (LH (-))

Click here
OK
5. INSPECT NO.1 SWITCH WIRE

a. Disconnect the No. 1 switch wire connector from the steering pad
switch.
below.
Standard Resistance

z21-1 (SUP) - "+" shift paddle operated and Below 2.5
z21-3 (ECC) held (up-shift) Ω
z21-1 (SUP) - "+" shift paddle not operated 1 MΩ or Text in Illustration
z21-3 (ECC) (up-shift) higher
z21-2 (SDN) - "-" shift paddle operated and Below 2.5 Component without harness connected
z21-3 (ECC) held (down-shift) Ω *a
(No. 1 switch wire)
z21-2 (SDN) - "-" shift paddle not operated 1 MΩ or
z21-3 (ECC) (down-shift) higher
NG REPLACE NO.1 SWITCH WIRE Click here
OK
6. INSPECT STEERING PAD SWITCH ASSEMBLY

a. Disconnect the steering pad switch assembly connector.
below.
Standard Resistance
Tester Specified
z15-10 (SUP) - "+" shift paddle operated Below 2.5
z15-7 (ECC) and held (up-shift) Ω
z15-4 (SDN) - "-" shift paddle operated and Below 2.5
z15-7 (ECC) held (down-shift) Ω
z15-10 (SUP) - "+" shift paddle not operated 1 MΩ or
z15-7 (ECC) (down-shift) higher Text in Illustration

*a
NG REPLACE STEERING PAD SWITCH ASSEMBLY Click here
OK
7. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (SPIRAL CABLE - ECM)

a. Disconnect the ECM connector.
b. Disconnect the transmission control switch (transmission floor shift
assembly) connector.
below.
Standard Resistance
Tester Specified
Switch Condition
A13-8 (SFTU) - "+" shift paddle operated Below 2.5
Body ground and held (up-shift) Ω
A13-7 (SFTD) - "-" shift paddle operated and Below 2.5
Body ground held (down-shift) Ω
A13-8 (SFTU) - "+" shift paddle not operated 1 MΩ or
Body ground (up-shift) higher
A13-7 (SFTD) - "-" shift paddle not operated 1 MΩ or
Body ground (down-shift) higher Text in Illustration
Rear view of wire harness connector

*a
(to ECM)
OK

Click here
DESCRIPTION
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
below.
Standard Resistance


*a
OK

below.
resistance.
Standard Resistance
Specified
(SUP)
z15-4 (SDN) - L110-12

(ECC)
Note

*a
OK

below.
Standard Resistance
Tester Specified

held (up-shift)

*a
NG Click here
OK

below.
Standard Resistance



*a

Click here
OK

switch.
below.
Standard Resistance

(No. 1 switch wire)
OK

below.
Standard Resistance
Tester Specified

*a
OK

below.
Standard Resistance
Tester Specified
Switch Condition

*a
(to ECM)
OK

Click here
DESCRIPTION
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
below.
Standard Resistance


*a
OK

below.
resistance.
Standard Resistance
Specified
(SUP)
z15-4 (SDN) - L110-12

(ECC)
Note

*a
OK

below.
Standard Resistance
Tester Specified

held (up-shift)

*a
NG Click here
OK

below.
Standard Resistance



*a

Click here
OK

switch.
below.
Standard Resistance

(No. 1 switch wire)
OK

below.
Standard Resistance
Tester Specified

*a
OK

below.
Standard Resistance
Tester Specified
Switch Condition

*a
(to ECM)
OK

Click here
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM TCM Power Source Circuit
DESCRIPTION
When the engine switch is turned on (IG), voltage from the ECM's MREL terminal is applied to the EFI MAIN 2 relay. This causes the contacts of the EFI
MAIN 2 relay to close, which supplies power to terminal +B of the TCM.
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
c. Measure the voltage of the wire harness side connectors.
Standard voltage

Condition
A12-6 (+B) - E5-7 Engine switch on 11 to 14 V
(E1) (IG)

Standard resistance

Result
Result Proceed to
NG A
OK (for 1UR-FSE) B
OK (for 1UR-FE) C
GO TO ECM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT (ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM / SFI
B SYSTEM) Click here
C GO TO ECM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT (ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM / SFI

SYSTEM) Click here
CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (TCM - EFI MAIN NO. 2 RELAY, GROUND)
DESCRIPTION
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
Standard voltage

Condition
(E1) (IG)

Standard resistance

Result
Result Proceed to
NG A
OK (for 1UR-FSE) B
OK (for 1UR-FE) C

SYSTEM) Click here
DESCRIPTION
WIRING DIAGRAM
PROCEDURE
Standard voltage

Condition
(E1) (IG)

Standard resistance

Result
Result Proceed to
NG A
OK (for 1UR-FSE) B
OK (for 1UR-FE) C

SYSTEM) Click here
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM Pattern Select Switch Circuit
DESCRIPTION
The combination switch sends signals to the mirror switch through LIN communication, and the TCM sends signals to the mirror switch through CAN
communication. When a combination switch signal is input into the TCM, the TCM sends a signal to the combination meter, which then illuminates the
indicator.
PROCEDURE
1. CHECK ECUS CONNECTED TO CAN BUS
a. Connect the GTS to the DLC3.
c. Turn the GTS on.
d. Check the ECUs connected to CAN bus.
Result
Result Proceed to
No malfunction appears A
Malfunction appears (for LHD) B
Malfunction appears (for RHD) C
B GO TO CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM Click here
C GO TO CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM Click here
2. CHECK DTC (ALL)

c. Turn the GTS on.
d. Check for DTCs.
Result
Condition Proceed to
DTC is not output A
CAN system DTC is output (for LHD) B
CAN system DTC is output (for RHD) C
LIN system DTC is output D
D GO TO LIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM Click here
A
3. READ VALUE USING DATA LIST (CENTER CONSOLE SWITCH)
c. Turn the GTS on.
d. Enter the following menus: Body / Center Console Switch / Data List.
e. Read the value displayed on the GTS.
Tester Display Measurement Item/Range Normal Condition Diagnostic

Note
Combination switch ON: Combination switch (SNOW) pushed

ECT Snow Mode (SNOW) status/
Switch -
ON or OFF OFF: Combination switch (SNOW) not pushed

Switch

NORMAL Mode (NORMAL) status/ held
Switch -
OK
On the GTS screen, item changes between ON and OFF according to switch operation.
NG REPLACE COMBINATION SWITCH ASSEMBLY Click here
OK

Click here
DESCRIPTION
indicator.
PROCEDURE
c. Turn the GTS on.
Result
Result Proceed to
2. CHECK DTC (ALL)

c. Turn the GTS on.
d. Check for DTCs.
Result
DTC is not output A
A
c. Turn the GTS on.

Note

Switch -

Switch

Switch -
OK
OK

Click here
DESCRIPTION
indicator.
PROCEDURE
c. Turn the GTS on.
Result
Result Proceed to
2. CHECK DTC (ALL)

c. Turn the GTS on.
d. Check for DTCs.
Result
DTC is not output A
A
c. Turn the GTS on.

Note

Switch -

Switch

Switch -
OK
OK

Click here
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID REPLACEMENT
1. REPLACE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID

a. Lift the vehicle. [*1]
Note
Set the vehicle on a lift so that the vehicle is kept level when it is lifted up (make sure that the tilt angle from the front to rear of the
vehicle is within +/-1°).
b. Remove the drain plug and gasket, and drain the ATF. [*2]
c. Temporarily install the gasket and drain plug. [*3]
Tech Tips
Reuse the old gasket. A new gasket will be installed in step [*15].
d. Remove the refill plug and overflow plug. [*4]
e. Add fluid to the refill hole until it flows out of the overflow plug
hole. [*5]
Note
Use Toyota Genuine ATF WS.
f. Wait until the fluid flow slows and only drops come out. [*6]
g. Temporarily install the gasket and overflow plug. [*7]
Tech Tips
Reuse the old gasket. The plug will be removed again to adjust the fluid
level.
h. Add fluid to the refill hole using the amount of fluid specified for
removal and installation of the oil pan. [*8]
Tech Tips
Specified amount of fluid is 3.2 liters (3.38 US qts, 2.82 Imp. qts).
i. Temporarily install the gasket and refill plug to avoid fluid spillage. [*9]
Tech Tips
Reuse the old gasket. The plug will be removed again to adjust the fluid level.
j. Lower the vehicle. [*10]
k. Start the engine. [*11]
Note
Make sure that the A/C switch is off.
l. Slowly move the shift lever from P to S, and then back to P. [*12]
m. Allow the engine to idle for 30 seconds to warm it up. [*13]
n. Turn the engine switch off. [*14]
o. Repeat steps [*1] to [*14].
p. Repeat steps [*1] to [*2].
q. Install a new gasket and the drain plug. [*15]
Torque:
20 N*m { 204 kgf*cm, 15 ft.*lbf }
r. Repeat steps [*4] to [*10].
s. Adjust the fluid level Click here.
t. Lower the vehicle.
u. Operation complete.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID ADJUSTMENT
1. BEFORE REFILL TRANSMISSION

This transmission requires Toyota Genuine ATF WS transmission fluid.
After servicing the transmission, you must refill the transmission with the correct amount of fluid.
Maintain the vehicle in a horizontal position while adjusting the fluid level.
If the entire transmission, transmission pan, drain plug, valve body and/or torque converter is replaced, proceed to the "FILL TRANSMISSION
PAN" procedures.
If the transmission hose, extension housing oil seal and/or radiator is replaced and/or a repair of oil leak is performed, proceed to the
"ADJUST FLUID LEVEL" procedures.
2. FILL TRANSMISSION PAN
a. Lift the vehicle up while keeping a level state.
b. Remove the refill plug and overflow plug.
*1 Refill Plug
*2 Overflow Plug
*a Refill Hole
c. Fill the transmission through the refill hole until fluid begins to
trickle out from the overflow tube.
d. Reinstall the overflow plug.
*1 Overflow Tube
*a Specified Fluid Level

3. FILL TRANSMISSION
a. Fill the transmission with the amount of fluid listed in the table below.
Standard capacity
Repair Specified Condition

Transmission pan and drain 3.2 liters (3.38 US qts, 2.82
plug removal Imp. qts)
Transmission valve body 4.2 liters (4.44 US qts, 3.70
removal Imp. qts)
Torque converter removal 6.7 liters (7.08 US qts, 5.90

Imp. qts)
Entire transmission assembly 9.9 liters (10.46 US qts, 8.71

Imp. qts)
4. ADJUST FLUID LEVEL

a. w/o Air Suspension:
Using SST, connect terminals 13 (TC) and 4 (CG) of the DLC3.
SST
09843-18040
b. w/ Air Suspension:
Using SST, connect terminals 13 (TC), 11 (OPB) and 4 (CG) of the
DLC3.
SST
09843-18040
Note Text in Illustration
Air conditioning switch must be turned off.
d. w/o Shift Paddle Switch: *A w/ Air Suspension
Slowly move the shift lever from P to S, then move the shift lever
from the 1 to 8. Then return the shift lever to P.
Slowly move the shift lever from P to M, then move the shift lever from the 1 to 8. Then return the shift lever to P.
f. Move the shift lever to the D position, and quickly move back and forth between N and D (once per less than 1.5 seconds)
for at least 6 seconds.
This will activate the fluid temperature detection mode.
Standard
Indicator light (D) remains illuminated for 2 seconds and then goes off.
g. w/o Air Suspension:
Return the shift lever to the P position and disconnect terminals 13 (TC) and 4 (CG).
h. w/ Air Suspension:
Return the shift lever to the P position and disconnect terminal 13 (TC).
i. Idle the engine to raise the temperature of the ATF.
j. When the indicator light (D) turns on, lift the vehicle up immediately.
Indicator light will indicate the ATF temperature
Lower than proper Proper Higher than proper

temp temp temp
Turn off Turn on Blinking
Note
Perform fluid level inspection while the indicator light turns on.
k. Remove the overflow plug. At the proper fluid inspection
temperature, check the fluid amount.
If the ATF flows from the overflow tube and the ATF flows in a thin
stream, the fluid amount is normal.
If the ATF does not flow from the overflow tube, add ATF into the
refill hole until ATF flows from the overflow tube. If the ATF flows in
a thin stream, the fluid amount is normal.
l. Install a new gasket and the overflow plug.
Torque:
20 N*m { 204 kgf*cm, 15 ft.*lbf }
m. Install a new O-ring and the refill plug.
Torque:
39 N*m { 398 kgf*cm, 29 ft.*lbf }
n. Lower the vehicle down.
o. Turn the engine switch off.
p. w/ Air Suspension:
Disconnect terminals 11 (OPB) and 4 (CG) of the DLC3.
*1 Refill Plug
*2 Overflow Plug
*a Refill Hole
*1 Overflow Tube
*a Specified Fluid Level

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION REAR OIL SEAL COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION REAR OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT
1. REMOVE PROPELLER WITH CENTER BEARING SHAFT ASSEMBLY

Click here
2. REMOVE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLANGE YOKE ASSEMBLY
a. Using SST and a hammer, loosen the staked part of the nut.
SST
09930-00010
Note
Be sure to use SST with the tapered surface facing the shaft.
Do not grind the tip of SST with a grinder or other device.
Completely loosen the staked part of the lock nut when removing it.
Do not damage the threads of the shaft.
Tech Tips
Move the shift lever to P.
b. Set SST.
SST
09330-00021
09950-30012 ( 09955-03040 )
c. Using SST and a 30 mm socket wrench, remove the nut.
d. Remove SST.
e. Tap out the flange yoke with a plastic-faced hammer to remove it.
*a Hold
*b Turn
f. Using a screwdriver, pry out the oil seal from the automatic
transmission flange yoke.
3. REMOVE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION REAR OIL SEAL

a. Using SST, tap out the automatic transmission oil seal.
SST
09308-00010
4. INSTALL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION REAR OIL SEAL
a. Coat the lip of a new automatic transmission oil seal. with MP grease.
b. Using SST and a hammer, tap in the automatic transmission oil seal..
SST
09214-76011
Standard depth
3.5 +/-0.2 mm (0.138 +/-0.008 in.)
5. INSTALL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLANGE YOKE ASSEMBLY

a. Using SST and a hammer, tap in a new oil seal.
SST
09950-60010 ( 09951-00410 )
09950-70010 ( 09951-07100 )
Oil seal drive in depth

0 to 0.3 mm (0 to 0.0118 in.)
b. Install the automatic transmission flange yoke assembly.
c. Set SST.
SST
09330-00021
09950-30012 ( 09955-03040 )
d. Using SST and a 30 mm socket wrench, install and tighten a new
nut.
Torque:
126 N*m { 1285 kgf*cm, 93 ft.*lbf }
*a Hold
*b Turn
e. Using a chisel and hammer, securely stake the lock nut.

6. INSTALL PROPELLER WITH CENTER BEARING SHAFT ASSEMBLY
Click here
7. ADJUST AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID
Click here
SPEED SENSOR REMOVAL

a. for LHD:
b. for RHD:
CAUTION:
activation.
Note
Torque:
20 N*m { 204 kgf*cm, 15 ft.*lbf }
sub-assembly.
Tech Tips

Note

Brass (nonmagnetic): bush wear



Note
8. REMOVE SPEED SENSOR NT

a. Disconnect the sensor connector.
b. Using a T30 ''TORX'' wrench, remove the bolt and speed sensor
from the oil pump.
9. REMOVE SPEED SENSOR NC3

b. Remove the bolt and speed sensor from the transmission case.
10. REMOVE SPEED SENSOR SP2

b. Remove the bolt and speed sensor from the transmission case.
SPEED SENSOR COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
SPEED SENSOR INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL SPEED SENSOR SP2

a. Install the speed sensor to the transmission case with the bolt.
Torque:
5.4 N*m { 55 kgf*cm, 48 in.*lbf }
b. Connect the sensor connector.
2. INSTALL SPEED SENSOR NC3

Torque:
5.4 N*m { 55 kgf*cm, 48 in.*lbf }
3. INSTALL SPEED SENSOR NT

a. Coat a new O-ring of the speed sensor with ATF.
b. Using a T30 ''TORX'' wench, install the speed sensor with the bolt.
Torque:
6.8 N*m { 69 kgf*cm, 60 in.*lbf }
c. Connect the sensor connector.

Torque:
11 N*m { 112 kgf*cm, 8 ft.*lbf }
Tech Tips
Bolt length
Note
Torque:
10 N*m { 102 kgf*cm, 7 ft.*lbf }

sensor.
Torque:
10 N*m { 102 kgf*cm, 7 ft.*lbf }

Note
Torque:
11 N*m { 112 kgf*cm, 8 ft.*lbf }
the 9 bolts.
Torque:
7.4 N*m { 75 kgf*cm, 65 in.*lbf }
Note
the oil pan.

Tech Tips
Torque:
for Nut A
39 N*m { 398 kgf*cm, 29 ft.*lbf }
for Bolt B
43 N*m { 438 kgf*cm, 32 ft.*lbf }

a. for LHD:
Note
b. for RHD:
Note

Note

Torque:
5.4 N*m { 55 kgf*cm, 48 in.*lbf }

Torque:
5.4 N*m { 55 kgf*cm, 48 in.*lbf }

Torque:
6.8 N*m { 69 kgf*cm, 60 in.*lbf }

Torque:
11 N*m { 112 kgf*cm, 8 ft.*lbf }
Tech Tips
Bolt length
Note
Torque:
10 N*m { 102 kgf*cm, 7 ft.*lbf }

sensor.
Torque:
10 N*m { 102 kgf*cm, 7 ft.*lbf }

Note
Torque:
11 N*m { 112 kgf*cm, 8 ft.*lbf }
the 9 bolts.
Torque:
7.4 N*m { 75 kgf*cm, 65 in.*lbf }
Note
the oil pan.

Tech Tips
Torque:
for Nut A
39 N*m { 398 kgf*cm, 29 ft.*lbf }
for Bolt B
43 N*m { 438 kgf*cm, 32 ft.*lbf }

a. for LHD:
Note
b. for RHD:
Note

Note

Torque:
5.4 N*m { 55 kgf*cm, 48 in.*lbf }

Torque:
5.4 N*m { 55 kgf*cm, 48 in.*lbf }

Torque:
6.8 N*m { 69 kgf*cm, 60 in.*lbf }

Torque:
11 N*m { 112 kgf*cm, 8 ft.*lbf }
Tech Tips
Bolt length
Note
Torque:
10 N*m { 102 kgf*cm, 7 ft.*lbf }

sensor.
Torque:
10 N*m { 102 kgf*cm, 7 ft.*lbf }

Note
Torque:
11 N*m { 112 kgf*cm, 8 ft.*lbf }
the 9 bolts.
Torque:
7.4 N*m { 75 kgf*cm, 65 in.*lbf }
Note
the oil pan.

Tech Tips
Torque:
for Nut A
39 N*m { 398 kgf*cm, 29 ft.*lbf }
for Bolt B
43 N*m { 438 kgf*cm, 32 ft.*lbf }

a. for LHD:
Note
b. for RHD:
Note

Note
VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY REMOVAL

a. for LHD:
b. for RHD:
CAUTION:
activation.
Note
Torque:
20 N*m { 204 kgf*cm, 15 ft.*lbf }
sub-assembly.
Tech Tips

Note




Note

VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL2

a. Remove the bolt, solenoid lock plate and straight pin.
b. Remove the solenoid valve.
2. REMOVE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL

a. Remove the bolt and solenoid valve.
3. REMOVE SOLENOID LOCK PLATE

a. Remove the 2 bolts and plate.

a. Remove the straight pin and solenoid valve.


8. REMOVE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SLU

9. REMOVE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SLT

10. REMOVE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SR
a. Remove the bolt and solenoid valve.
11. REMOVE OIL PRESSURE SWITCH

VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY INSPECTION

a. Measure the resistance of the shift solenoid valve.
Standard resistance

Condition
If the resistance is not within the specified range, replace the shift
solenoid valve SL1.
b. Connect the battery's positive (+) lead with a 21 W bulb to
operating noise.
OK

Standard resistance

Condition
solenoid valve SL2.
operating noise.
OK
Standard resistance
Specified
solenoid valve SL3.
operating noise.
OK

Standard resistance
Condition
solenoid valve SL4.
operating noise.
OK

Standard resistance
Specified
solenoid valve SL5.
operating noise.
OK

Standard resistance
Specified
Shift solenoid valve SL body (68°F) Ω
solenoid valve SL.
b. Connect the battery's positive (+) lead to the terminal of the
noise.
OK

Standard resistance
Specified
solenoid valve SLU.
operating noise.
OK

Standard resistance

Condition
solenoid valve SLT.
operating noise.
OK

Standard resistance
Specified
solenoid valve SR.
b. Connect the battery's positive (+) lead to the terminal of the
noise.
OK
VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL OIL PRESSURE SWITCH

Torque:
4.5 N*m { 46 kgf*cm, 40 in.*lbf }
2. INSTALL SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SR

a. Install the solenoid valve with the bolt.
Torque:
10 N*m { 102 kgf*cm, 7 ft.*lbf }
3. INSTALL SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SLT

a. Install the solenoid valve.
b. Install the straight pin.
4. INSTALL SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SLU

5. INSTALL SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL1




9. INSTALL SOLENOID LOCK PLATE

a. Install the plate with the 2 bolts.
Torque:
6.4 N*m { 65 kgf*cm, 57 in.*lbf }
10. INSTALL SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL
a. Install the solenoid valve with the bolt.
Torque:
10 N*m { 102 kgf*cm, 7 ft.*lbf }

b. Install the straight pin and solenoid lock plate with the bolt.
Torque:
6.4 N*m { 65 kgf*cm, 57 in.*lbf }
VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION


Torque:
11 N*m { 112 kgf*cm, 8 ft.*lbf }
Tech Tips
Bolt length
Note
Torque:
10 N*m { 102 kgf*cm, 7 ft.*lbf }

g. Coat a new O-ring with ATF and install to the ATF temperature
sensor.
Torque:
10 N*m { 102 kgf*cm, 7 ft.*lbf }
Note
Torque:
11 N*m { 112 kgf*cm, 8 ft.*lbf }

the 9 bolts.
Torque:
7.3 N*m { 74 kgf*cm, 64 in.*lbf }
Note
the oil pan.

Tech Tips
Torque:
for Nut A
39 N*m { 398 kgf*cm, 29 ft.*lbf }
for Bolt B
43 N*m { 438 kgf*cm, 32 ft.*lbf }

a. for LHD:
Note
b. for RHD:
Note
8. CHECK AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM PRECAUTION
a. After replacing the valve body or solenoid valve, certain procedures are necessary Click here.
Note


Torque:
11 N*m { 112 kgf*cm, 8 ft.*lbf }
Tech Tips
Bolt length
Note
Torque:
10 N*m { 102 kgf*cm, 7 ft.*lbf }

sensor.
Torque:
10 N*m { 102 kgf*cm, 7 ft.*lbf }
Note
Torque:
11 N*m { 112 kgf*cm, 8 ft.*lbf }

the 9 bolts.
Torque:
7.3 N*m { 74 kgf*cm, 64 in.*lbf }
Note
the oil pan.

Tech Tips
Torque:
for Nut A
39 N*m { 398 kgf*cm, 29 ft.*lbf }
for Bolt B
43 N*m { 438 kgf*cm, 32 ft.*lbf }

a. for LHD:
Note
b. for RHD:
Note
Note


Torque:
11 N*m { 112 kgf*cm, 8 ft.*lbf }
Tech Tips
Bolt length
Note
Torque:
10 N*m { 102 kgf*cm, 7 ft.*lbf }

sensor.
Torque:
10 N*m { 102 kgf*cm, 7 ft.*lbf }
Note
Torque:
11 N*m { 112 kgf*cm, 8 ft.*lbf }

the 9 bolts.
Torque:
7.3 N*m { 74 kgf*cm, 64 in.*lbf }
Note
the oil pan.

Tech Tips
Torque:
for Nut A
39 N*m { 398 kgf*cm, 29 ft.*lbf }
for Bolt B
43 N*m { 438 kgf*cm, 32 ft.*lbf }

a. for LHD:
Note
b. for RHD:
Note
Note
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION
1. CHECK SHIFT LOCK OPERATION

a. Move the shift lever to P.
c. Check that the shift lever cannot be moved to any position other than P.
d. Turn the engine switch on (IG), depress the brake pedal and check that the shift lever can be moved to other positions.
2. CHECK SHIFT LOCK RELEASE BUTTON OPERATION
a. When operating the shift lever with the shift lock release button pressed, check that the lever can be moved to any
position other than P.
If the operation cannot be performed as specified, check the shift lever assembly.
3. CHECK SHIFT LOCK CONTROL ECU
a. Measure the voltage according to the values in the table below.
Tech Tips
Do not disconnect the shift lock control ECU connector.
Standard voltage

12 (IG) - 3 (E) Engine switch on 10 to 14 V

(IG)
12 (IG) - 3 (E) Engine switch off Below 1 V
6 (STP) - 3 (E) Depress brake pedal 10 to 14 V
6 (STP) - 3 (E) Release brake pedal Below 1 V
b. Measure the resistance according to the value in the table below.

Tech Tips
Do not disconnect the shift lock control ECU connector.
Standard resistance
Tester Condition Condition Specified Condition

3 (E) - Body ground Always Below 1 Ω
If the result is not as specified, replace the transmission floor shift

assembly.
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM INSPECTION
1. INSPECT SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID

a. Measure the resistance according to the value in the table below.
Tech Tips
Disconnect the solenoid connector.
Standard resistance

3 (SLS-) - 4 (SLS+) 25°C (77°F) 104 to 126 Ω

assembly.
b. Measure the resistance according to the values in the table below.

Tech Tips
Disconnect the solenoid connector.
Standard resistance
Tester Specified
1 (P+) - 2 (P-) Push parking position 10 kΩ or higher

switch
1 (P+) - 2 (P-) Release parking position Below 1 Ω

switch

assembly.
FLOOR SHIFT ASSEMBLY ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION
1. INSPECT SHIFT LEVER POSITION

a. When moving the shift lever from P to R with the engine switch on (IG) and brake pedal depressed, make sure that it
moves smoothly and correctly into position.
b. Start the engine and make sure that the vehicle moves forward when moving the shift lever from N to D and moves
rearward when moving to R. If the operation cannot be performed as specified, inspect the park/neutral position switch
assembly and check the shift lever assembly installation condition.
FLOOR SHIFT ASSEMBLY COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
FLOOR SHIFT ASSEMBLY REMOVAL
Tech Tips
Use the same procedure for the RHD and LHD sides.
The procedure listed below is for the LHD sides.
a. Move the shift lever to the N.
b. Remove the nut and disconnect the floor shift gear shifting rod
sub-assembly.
2. REMOVE CONSOLE BOX ASSEMBLY

for 5-Passenger with Ottoman: Click here
w/o Rear Seat Entertainment System: Click here
w/ DVD Plater: Click here
3. REMOVE NO. 1 CONSOLE BOX DUCT
a. Disconnect the 2 wire harness clamps from the No. 1 console box
duct.
b. Remove the 2 clips and pull out the No. 1 console box duct.
4. REMOVE TRANSMISSION FLOOR SHIFT ASSEMBLY

a. for LHD:
i. Disconnect the 2 connectors.
ii. Disconnect the 6 wire harness clamps from the transmission
floor shift assembly.
b. for RHD:
i. Disconnect the 3 connectors.
ii. Disconnect the 5 wire harness clamps from the transmission
floor shift assembly.
c. Remove the 4 bolts and transmission floor shift assembly.
FLOOR SHIFT ASSEMBLY DISASSEMBLY
Tech Tips
1. REMOVE SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR
a. Remove the 2 screws and detach the 3 hooks. Then remove the
shift position indicator from the rear upper console panel sub-
assembly.
2. REMOVE SHIFT LEVER BOOT COVER

a. Detach the 4 claws and remove the shift lever boot cover.
3. REMOVE SHIFTING HOLE COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY

a. Detach the 4 claws and remove the shifting hole cover sub-
assembly.
4. REMOVE SHIFT LEVER CAP

a. Detach the 2 claws and remove the shift lever cap.
5. REMOVE CONTROL POSITION INDICATOR PLATE
a. Remove the control position indicator plate.
6. REMOVE SHIFT LOCK RELEASE BUTTON

a. Detach the claw and remove the shift lock release button.
7. REMOVE INDICATOR LIGHT WIRE SUB-ASSEMBLY

a. Disconnect the connector.
b. Detach the connector clamp and remove the indicator light wire
sub-assembly.
FLOOR SHIFT ASSEMBLY INSPECTION
Tech Tips
Depending on the specifications of the vehicle, the shift lever will have an "S" or "M" position. The following inspection procedure refers to this
position as the "S" shift lever position.
a. Measure the resistance between each terminal of the shift lock
control unit assembly when the shift lever is moved to each
position.
Standard Resistance
Tester Specified
Connection Shift Lever Position Condition

"

(E) Below 1 Ω
(Up-shift)

(E) Below 1 Ω
(Down-shift)
Shift lever not in S, "+"
3 (IG) - 7 (S) or "-" 10 kΩ or higher
(E)
1 (SFTD) - 5 *a
Shift lever in S 10 kΩ or higher (Transmission Control Switch)
(E)
If the resistance value is not as specified, replace the transmission floor shift assembly.
FLOOR SHIFT ASSEMBLY ADJUSTMENT

a. Remove the nut and disconnect the floor shift gear shifting rod
sub-assembly.
b. Turn the control shaft lever of the park/neutral position switch

counterclockwise until it stops, and turn it clockwise 2 notches to
set it to N.
c. Move the shift lever to N and tighten the nut while lightly pushing
the lever toward R.
Torque:
13 N*m { 130 kgf*cm, 9 ft.*lbf }
Note
Do not push the shift lever too hard.
d. Check that the shift lever moves smoothly and the shift lever and
gear operate correctly.
FLOOR SHIFT ASSEMBLY REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL INDICATOR LIGHT WIRE SUB-ASSEMBLY

a. Attach the connector clamp and install the indicator light wire sub-assembly.
b. Connect the connector.
2. INSTALL SHIFT LOCK RELEASE BUTTON
a. Attach the claw to install the shift lock release button.
3. INSTALL CONTROL POSITION INDICATOR PLATE
a. Install the control position indicator plate.
4. INSTALL SHIFT LEVER CAP
a. Attach the 2 claws to install the shift lever cap.
5. INSTALL SHIFTING HOLE COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY
a. Attach the 4 claws to install the shifting hole cover sub-assembly.
6. INSTALL SHIFT LEVER BOOT COVER
a. Attach the 4 claws to install the shifting lever boot cover.
7. INSTALL SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR
a. Attach the 3 hooks and then install the shift position indicator to the rear console upper panel with the 2 screws.
FLOOR SHIFT ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL TRANSMISSION FLOOR SHIFT ASSEMBLY

a. Install the transmission floor shift assembly with the 4 bolts.
Torque:
8.3 N*m { 85 kgf*cm, 74 in.*lbf }
b. for LHD:
i. Connect the 2 connectors.
ii. Connect the 6 wire harness clamps to the transmission floor shift assembly.
c. for RHD:
i. Connect the 3 connectors.
ii. Connect the 5 wire harness clamps to the transmission floor shift assembly.
2. INSTALL NO. 1 CONSOLE BOX DUCT
a. Install the No. 1 console box duct with the 2 clips.
b. Connect the 2 wire harness clamps to the transmission floor shift assembly.
3. INSTALL CONSOLE BOX ASSEMBLY
for 5-Passenger with Ottoman: Click here
w/o Rear Seat Entertainment System: Click here
w/ DVD Player: Click here
a. Temporarily connect the floor shift gear shifting rod sub-assembly to the connecting rod swivel with the nut.
Tech Tips
Click here
Click here
SHIFT PADDLE SWITCH REMOVAL
1. REMOVE STEERING WHEEL ASSEMBLY

Click here
2. REMOVE STEERING WHEEL BOSS COVER LOWER
Click here
3. REMOVE NO. 1 SWITCH WIRE
a. Disconnect the 2 connectors.
b. Detach the 5 guides and remove the No. 1 switch wire from the
steering wheel boss lower cover.
4. REMOVE TRANSMISSION SHIFT SWITCH ASSEMBLY

a. Detach the 4 claws and remove the 2 transmission shift switch
assemblies from the steering wheel boss lower cover.
SHIFT PADDLE SWITCH COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
SHIFT PADDLE SWITCH INSPECTION
1. INSPECT TRANSMISSION SHIFT SWITCH ASSEMBLY

a. Disconnect the No. 1 switch wire connector from the transmission shift switch assembly.
b. Measure the resistance between each terminal when the
transmission shift switch assembly is moved to each position.
Standard Resistance

SDN - ECC "-" shift paddle operated and Below 2.5 Ω

held (down-shift)

(down-shift) higher
SUP - ECC "+" shift paddle operated and Below 2.5 Ω Text in Illustration
held (upshift)
"+" shift paddle not operated 1 MΩ or *1 for LH ("-")
SUP - ECC (up-shift) higher
*2 for RH ("+")
If the resistance value is not as specified, replace the transmission
shift switch assembly. Component without harness connected
*a
(Transmission Shift Switch Assembly)
2. INSPECT NO. 1 SWITCH WIRE

a. Connect the No. 1 switch wire connector to the transmission shift
switch assembly.
b. Disconnect the steering pad switch connector from the No. 1 switch
wire.
c. Measure the resistance between each terminal when the
transmission shift switch assembly is moved to each position.
Standard Resistance

1 (SUP) - 3 "+" shift paddle operated and Below 2.5 Ω Text in Illustration
(ECC) held (upshift)
1 (SUP) - 3 "+" shift paddle not operated 1 MΩ or Front view of wire harness connector
(ECC) (up-shift) higher *a
(No. 1 Switch Wire)
2 (SDN) - 3 "-" shift paddle operated and Below 2.5 Ω
(ECC) held (down-shift)
2 (SDN) - 3 "-" shift paddle not operated 1 MΩ or
(ECC) (down-shift) higher
If the resistance value is not as specified, replace the No. 1 switch wire.
SHIFT PADDLE SWITCH INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL TRANSMISSION SHIFT SWITCH ASSEMBLY

a. Attach the 4 claws and install the 2 transmission shift switch assemblies to the steering wheel boss lower cover.
2. INSTALL NO. 1 SWITCH WIRE
a. Connect the 2 connectors.
Note
Make sure that the colored connectors are connected to the locations as
b. Attach the 5 guides to install the No. 1 switch wire.
*a Blue Color
*b Yellow Color
3. INSTALL STEERING WHEEL BOSS COVER LOWER

Click here
4. INSTALL STEERING WHEEL ASSEMBLY
Click here
COMBINATION SWITCH COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
COMBINATION SWITCH REMOVAL
Tech Tips
1. REMOVE SHIFT LEVER KNOB SUB-ASSEMBLY
a. Lower the shift lever boot and disconnect it from the shift lever
knob sub-assembly.
b. Twist the shift lever knob sub-assembly in the direction indicated

by the arrow and remove it.
2. REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END LH

a. Pull the front part of the instrument panel finish panel end LH to
detach the 6 clips.
b. Pull the instrument panel finish panel end LH to detach 3 clips and
remove the instrument panel finish panel end LH.
3. REMOVE INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END RH
Tech Tips
Use the same procedure described for the LH side.
4. REMOVE NO. 3 BOX PANEL
a. Detach the 4 claws and remove the No. 3 box panel.
5. REMOVE REAR CONSOLE UPPER PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY
a. Apply protective tape as shown in the illustration.
b. Move the shift lever to N.
c. Remove the 2 screws.
d. Detach the 6 clips and remove the upper rear console panel sub-
assembly.
e. Disconnect each connector and each wire harness clamp.
*1 Protective Tape
6. REMOVE SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR

a. Remove the 2 screws and detach the 3 hooks. Then remove the
shift position indicator from the rear upper console panel sub-
assembly.
7. REMOVE COMBINATION SWITCH

a. Disconnect the connector.
b. Detach the 4 claws and remove the combination switch from the
rear upper console panel sub-assembly.
COMBINATION SWITCH INSTALLATION
Tech Tips
1. INSTALL COMBINATION SWITCH
a. Attach the 4 claws to install the rear upper console panel sub-assembly.
b. Connect the connector.
2. INSTALL SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR
a. Attach the 3 hooks and then install the shift position indicator to the rear console upper panel with the 2 screws.
3. INSTALL REAR CONSOLE UPPER PANEL SUB-ASSEMBLY
a. Connect each connector and attach each wire harness clamp.
b. Attach the 6 clips to install the upper rear console panel sub-
assembly.
c. Install the 2 screws.
4. INSTALL NO. 3 BOX PANEL

a. Attach the 4 claws to install the No. 3 box panel.
5. INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END LH
a. Attach the rear part of the instrument panel finish panel end LH 3 clips.
b. Attach the front part of the instrument panel finish panel end LH 6 clips to install the instrument panel finish panel end LH.
6. INSTALL INSTRUMENT PANEL FINISH PANEL END RH
Tech Tips
Use the same procedure described for the LH side.
7. INSTALL SHIFT LEVER KNOB SUB-ASSEMBLY
a. Twist the shift lever knob sub-assembly in the direction indicated
by the arrow to install it.
b. Pull up the shift lever boot to connect it to the shift lever knob sub-
assembly.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY REMOVAL

a. for LHD:
b. for RHD:
2. PRECAUTION
Note
Note
When disconnecting the cable, some systems need to be initialized after the cable is reconnected Click here.
Torque:
20 N*m { 204 kgf*cm, 15 ft.*lbf }
5. REMOVE EXHAUST MANIFOLD
for 1UR-FSE: Click here
for 1UR-FE: Click here
6. REMOVE STARTER ASSEMBLY
sub-assembly.
8. REMOVE TRANSMISSION CONTROL SHAFT LEVER RH
a. Remove the nut and transmission control shaft lever RH together
with the floor shift gear shifting rod subassembly.
9. DISCONNECT OIL COOLER TUBE INLET AND OUTLET

a. Remove the 2 bolts and 2 clamps.
*1 Oil Cooler Tube Inlet *2 Oil Cooler Tube Outlet
b. Loosen the union nuts of the oil cooler tube inlet and oil cooler tube outlet and disconnect them.
10. SUPPORT AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
a. Support the automatic transmission assembly with a transmission jack.
Note
In order to protect the oil pan, place attachments onto the transmission jack.
Make sure that the attachments and the oil pan are centered on the transmission jack.
11. REMOVE ENGINE REAR MOUNTING MEMBER
a. Remove the 4 nuts.
b. Remove the 6 bolts and the engine rear mounting member.
12. DISCONNECT WIRE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR

a. Remove the bolt and disconnect the ground wire.
b. Tilt the automatic transmission assembly downward.
Note
Take care so that the rear side of the engine assembly does not come into
contact with the body.
c. Disconnect the park/neutral position switch connector.
d. Disconnect the transmission wire connector.

Tech Tips
e. Detach the 5 harness clamps from the automatic transmission
assembly.
13. REMOVE DRIVE PLATE AND TORQUE CONVERTER SETTING BOLT

a. Turn the crankshaft to gain access to each bolt and remove the 6
drive plate and torque converter setting bolts while holding the
crankshaft pulley bolt with a wrench.
14. REMOVE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY

a. Remove the 10 bolts, and then remove the automatic transmission
assembly from the engine assembly.
Note
To prevent damage to the knock pins, do not pry between the automatic
transmission assembly and engine assembly.
15. REMOVE ENGINE REAR MOUNTING INSULATOR

a. Remove the 4 bolts and engine rear mounting insulator.
16. REMOVE TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH ASSEMBLY

a. Remove the torque converter assembly from the automatic transmission assembly.
Note
Remove the torque converter assembly from the input shaft horizontally.

a. for LHD:
b. for RHD:
2. PRECAUTION
Note
Note
Torque:
20 N*m { 204 kgf*cm, 15 ft.*lbf }
sub-assembly.

Note

Note

Tech Tips
assembly.


Note


Note

a. for LHD:
b. for RHD:
2. PRECAUTION
Note
Note
Torque:
20 N*m { 204 kgf*cm, 15 ft.*lbf }
sub-assembly.

Note

Note

Tech Tips
assembly.


Note


Note
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION
1. INSPECT TORQUE CONVERTER ASSEMBLY

a. Inspect the 1-way clutch.
i. Press on the serrations of the starter with a finger and
rotate it. Check that it rotates smoothly when turned
clockwise and locks up when turned counterclockwise.
If necessary, clean the converter and recheck the 1-way
clutch.
Replace the converter if the 1-way clutch still fails the
check.
b. Determine the condition of the torque converter clutch.

i. Check that the following conditions are met:
During the stall test or when the shift lever is on N, metallic
sounds are not emitted from the torque converter clutch.
The 1-way clutch turns in one direction and locks in the other
direction.
The amount of powder in the ATF is not greater than the
sample shown in the illustration.
Tech Tips
The sample illustration shows approximately 0.25 liters (0.26 US
qts, 0.22 Imp. qts) of the ATF taken from a removed torque
converter clutch.
c. Replace the ATF in the torque converter clutch.
i. If the ATF is discolored and/or has a foul odor, completely
stir the ATF in the torque converter clutch and drain the
ATF with the torque converter facing upward.
2. INSTALL TORQUE CONVERTER ASSEMBLY

a. Engage the splines of the input shaft and turbine runner.
b. Engage the splines of the stator shaft and stator while turning the
torque converter assembly.
Tech Tips
If the stator shaft splines are difficult to engage with the stator splines,
move the torque converter back approximately 10 mm (0.394 in.) and
engage the splines while rotating the torque converter assembly.
c. Turn the torque converter assembly to engage the key of the oil
pump drive gear into the slot on the torque converter assembly.
d. Clean the drive plate and torque converter setting bolt holes.
e. Using a vernier caliper and straightedge, measure dimension A

between the transmission contact surface of the engine and the
torque converter contact surface of the drive plate.
*1 Engine Surface
*2 Drive Plate Surface
f. Using a vernier caliper and straightedge, measure dimension B

shown in the illustration and check that dimension B is more than
dimension A, which was measured in the previous step.
Standard
A + 1 mm (0.0394 in.) or more
Note
Make sure to deduct the thickness of the straightedge.
If the transaxle is installed to the engine with the torque converter
not sufficiently inserted, the torque converter may be damaged.
3. INSTALL ENGINE REAR MOUNTING INSULATOR

a. Install the engine rear mounting insulator with the 4 bolts.
Torque:
40 N*m { 408 kgf*cm, 30 ft.*lbf }
4. INSTALL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
a. Apply clutch spline grease to the circumference of the crankshaft
contact surface with the torque converter centerpiece.
Clutch spline grease
Toyota Genuine Clutch Spline Grease or equivalent
Maximum spread
About 1 g (0.0353 oz.)
*1 Crankshaft
*2 Torque Converter Centerpiece
b. Confirm that 2 knock pins are on the transmission contact surface

of the engine block before transmission installation.
Torque:
for Bolt A (17 mm head bolt)
71 N*m { 724 kgf*cm, 52 ft.*lbf }
for Bolt B (14 mm head bolt)
37 N*m { 377 kgf*cm, 27 ft.*lbf }
Note
Make sure that the mark is positioned as shown in the illustration.
Do not use excess force to pry on the automatic transmission
assembly.
5. INSTALL DRIVE PLATE AND TORQUE CONVERTER SETTING BOLT

a. Turn the crankshaft to gain access to the installation locations of the 6 torque converter setting bolts and install each bolt
while holding the crankshaft pulley bolt with a wrench.
Torque:
48 N*m { 489 kgf*cm, 35 ft.*lbf }
Note
First install the black colored bolt, and then the remaining 5 silver colored bolts.
6. CONNECT WIRE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
a. Tilt down the automatic transmission assembly.
b. Connect the park/neutral position switch connector.
c. Connect the transmission wire connector.
Tech Tips
a connection sound.
d. Attach the 5 harness clamps to the automatic transmission
assembly.
e. Tilt up the automatic transmission assembly.
f. Install the bolt and ground wire to the automatic transmission
assembly.
Torque:
5.4 N*m { 55 kgf*cm, 48 in.*lbf }
7. INSTALL ENGINE REAR MOUNTING MEMBER

a. Install the engine rear mounting member to the body with the 6 bolts.
Torque:
26 N*m { 260 kgf*cm, 19 ft.*lbf }
b. Install the engine rear mounting member to the automatic transmission assembly with the 4 nuts.
Torque:
14 N*m { 138 kgf*cm, 10 ft.*lbf }
8. CONNECT OIL COOLER TUBE INLET AND OUTLET
a. Temporarily install the oil cooler tube inlet and oil cooler tube outlet.
b. Install the 2 clamps with the 2 bolts.
Torque:
5.5 N*m { 56 kgf*cm, 49 in.*lbf }
c. Using a union nut wrench, tighten the union nuts of the oil cooler
tube inlet and oil cooler tube outlet.
Torque:
44 N*m { 450 kgf*cm, 33 ft.*lbf }
Note
Use the formula to calculate special torque values for situations where a
union nut wrench is combined with a torque wrench Click here.
9. INSTALL TRANSMISSION CONTROL SHAFT LEVER RH

a. Install the transmission control shaft lever RH together with the floor shift gear shifting rod subassembly with the nut.
Torque:
16 N*m { 160 kgf*cm, 12 ft.*lbf }
a. Temporarily connect the floor shift gear sifting rod sub-assembly to the connecting rod swivel with the nut.
Tech Tips
11. INSTALL STARTER ASSEMBLY
Click here
12. INSTALL EXHAUST MANIFOLD
a. for 1UR-FSE:
Click here
b. for 1UR-FE:
Click here
Note
a. for LHD:
Note
b. for RHD:
Note

Click here
Click here
Click here
18. CHECK RESET MEMORY
Click here

clutch.
check.

direction.
Tech Tips
converter clutch.

Tech Tips

*1 Engine Surface

Standard
A + 1 mm (0.0394 in.) or more
Note

Torque:
40 N*m { 408 kgf*cm, 30 ft.*lbf }
Maximum spread
About 1 g (0.0353 oz.)
*1 Crankshaft

Torque:
71 N*m { 724 kgf*cm, 52 ft.*lbf }
37 N*m { 377 kgf*cm, 27 ft.*lbf }
Note
assembly.

Torque:
48 N*m { 489 kgf*cm, 35 ft.*lbf }
Note
Tech Tips
a connection sound.
assembly.
assembly.
Torque:
5.4 N*m { 55 kgf*cm, 48 in.*lbf }

Torque:
35 N*m { 354 kgf*cm, 26 ft.*lbf }
Torque:
14 N*m { 138 kgf*cm, 10 ft.*lbf }
Torque:
5.5 N*m { 56 kgf*cm, 49 in.*lbf }
Torque:
44 N*m { 450 kgf*cm, 33 ft.*lbf }
Note

Torque:
16 N*m { 160 kgf*cm, 12 ft.*lbf }
Tech Tips
Click here
a. for 1UR-FSE:
Click here
b. for 1UR-FE:
Click here
Note
a. for LHD:
Note
b. for RHD:
Note

Click here
Click here
Click here
Click here

clutch.
check.

direction.
Tech Tips
converter clutch.

Tech Tips

*1 Engine Surface

Standard
A + 1 mm (0.0394 in.) or more
Note

Torque:
40 N*m { 408 kgf*cm, 30 ft.*lbf }
Maximum spread
About 1 g (0.0353 oz.)
*1 Crankshaft

Torque:
71 N*m { 724 kgf*cm, 52 ft.*lbf }
37 N*m { 377 kgf*cm, 27 ft.*lbf }
Note
assembly.

Torque:
48 N*m { 489 kgf*cm, 35 ft.*lbf }
Note
Tech Tips
a connection sound.
assembly.
assembly.
Torque:
5.4 N*m { 55 kgf*cm, 48 in.*lbf }

Torque:
35 N*m { 354 kgf*cm, 26 ft.*lbf }
Torque:
14 N*m { 138 kgf*cm, 10 ft.*lbf }
Torque:
5.5 N*m { 56 kgf*cm, 49 in.*lbf }
Torque:
44 N*m { 450 kgf*cm, 33 ft.*lbf }
Note

Torque:
16 N*m { 160 kgf*cm, 12 ft.*lbf }
Tech Tips
Click here
a. for 1UR-FSE:
Click here
b. for 1UR-FE:
Click here
Note
a. for LHD:
Note
b. for RHD:
Note

Click here
Click here
Click here
Click here
TORQUE CONVERTER AND DRIVE PLATE INSPECTION

clutch.
check.

direction.
Tech Tips
converter clutch.
2. INSPECT RUNOUT OF DRIVE PLATE & RING GEAR SUB-ASSEMBLY

a. Set up a dial indicator and measure the drive plate runout.
Maximum runout
0.20 mm (0.0079 in.)
If the runout is not within the specification or if the ring gear is
damaged, replace the drive plate.
TCM COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
TCM REMOVAL

a. for LHD:
b. for RHD:
2. PRECAUTION
Note
Note
4. REMOVE AIR CLEANER INLET COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY
a. Remove the 5 clips labeled A.
b. Lift up the air cleaner inlet cover sub-assembly to detach the 4
clips labeled B, and remove the air cleaner inlet cover sub-
assembly.
5. REMOVE ENGINE ROOM SIDE COVER LH

a. Remove the 5 clips and engine room side cover LH.
*A for LHD
*B for RHD
6. REMOVE ENGINE ROOM ECU COVER
Note
Wipe off any water on or around the engine room ECU cover.
Perform these procedures in a dry place away from rain, etc.
Do not allow water to enter the ECM through its connectors areas, screw
areas, etc.
a. Remove the 3 bolts and engine room ECU cover.
7. REMOVE TCM
b. Remove the 2 nuts and TCM.
TCM REMOVAL

a. for LHD:
b. for RHD:
2. PRECAUTION
Note
Note
assembly.

*A for LHD
*B for RHD
Note
areas, etc.
7. REMOVE TCM
TCM REMOVAL

a. for LHD:
b. for RHD:
2. PRECAUTION
Note
Note
assembly.

*A for LHD
*B for RHD
Note
areas, etc.
7. REMOVE TCM
TCM INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL TCM
a. Install the TCM with the 2 nuts.
Torque:
5.5 N*m { 56 kgf*cm, 48 in.*lbf }
b. Connect the 4 connectors.
2. INSTALL ENGINE ROOM ECU COVER
a. Install the engine room ECU cover with the 3 bolts.
Torque:
5.5 N*m { 56 kgf*cm, 49 in.*lbf }
3. INSTALL ENGINE ROOM SIDE COVER LH

a. Install the engine room side cover LH with the 5 clips.
4. INSTALL AIR CLEANER INLET COVER SUB-ASSEMBLY
a. Attach the 4 clips labeled B.
Note
Make sure the clips are attached securely.
Attaching the clips forcefully or hitting the top of the clips may
damage them.
b. Install the air cleaner inlet cover sub-assembly with the 5 clips
labeled A.
Note
a. for LHD:
Note
b. for RHD:
Note
7. PERFORM RESET MEMORY

Click here
TCM INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL TCM
Torque:
5.5 N*m { 56 kgf*cm, 48 in.*lbf }
Torque:
5.5 N*m { 56 kgf*cm, 49 in.*lbf }

Note
damage them.
labeled A.
Note
a. for LHD:
Note
b. for RHD:
Note

Click here
TCM INSTALLATION
1. INSTALL TCM
Torque:
5.5 N*m { 56 kgf*cm, 48 in.*lbf }
Torque:
5.5 N*m { 56 kgf*cm, 49 in.*lbf }

Note
damage them.
labeled A.
Note
a. for LHD:
Note
b. for RHD:
Note

Click here
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION UNIT COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
ILLUSTRATION
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION UNIT DISASSEMBLY

a. Remove the nut and transmission control shaft lever.
2. REMOVE PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSEMBLY

a. Using a screwdriver, bend the tabs of the lock washer.
b. Remove the nut and lock washer.
c. Remove the bolt and park/neutral position switch.
Tech Tips
Make sure that the manual valve lever shaft has not been rotated prior to
installing the park/neutral position switch as the detent spring may become
detached from the manual valve lever shaft.
3. REMOVE OIL COOLER TUBE UNION

a. Remove the 2 oil cooler tube unions.
b. Remove the O-rings from the oil cooler tube unions.
4. REMOVE NO. 1 BREATHER PLUG
5. REMOVE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLANGE YOKE ASSEMBLY

a. Using SST and a hammer, loosen the staked part of the nut.
SST
09930-00010
b. Using SST and a 30 mm socket wrench, remove the nut.

SST
09330-00021
09950-30012 ( 09955-03040 )
c. Remove SST.
d. Tap the flange yoke with a plastic-faced hammer to remove it.
e. Remove the 2 output shaft rear bearing No. 1 spacers and rear
cover sleeve.
f. Using a screwdriver, pry out the oil seal from the flange yoke.
Note
Do not turn the transmission over as this will contaminate the valve body with foreign matter located at the bottom of the pan.
a. Remove the overflow plug and gasket.
b. Remove the drain plug and gasket.
c. Remove the 9 bolts, oil pan and gasket.
d. Examine the particles in the pan.

i. Remove the magnets from the oil pan. Use the removed
magnets to collect any steel chips. Look carefully at the
chips and particles in the pan and on the magnet to
anticipate the type of wear which might be found in the
transmission.
Steel (magnetic): bearing, gear and plate wear
a. Remove the 4 bolts and valve body oil strainer from the valve
body.
b. Remove the O-ring from the valve body oil strainer.

c. Disconnect the 8 connectors from the solenoid valves.
d. Remove the bolt, detent spring cover and detent spring.
e. Remove the 17 bolts.

f. Remove the valve body.
9. REMOVE CHECK BALL BODY

a. Remove the check ball body and spring.
10. REMOVE TRANSMISSION WIRE

a. Disconnect the 3 connectors from the 3 speed sensors.
b. Remove the O-ring from the speed sensor NT.
c. Remove the bolt and pull out the transmission wire.

d. Remove the O-ring from the transmission wire connector.
11. REMOVE SPEED SENSOR

a. Remove the 2 bolts and 2 speed sensors NC3 and SP2.
b. Using a T30 ''TORX'' wrench, remove the bolt and speed sensor NT.
12. REMOVE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CASE PLUG
a. Remove the plug and O-ring.
13. REMOVE PARKING LOCK PAWL BRACKET

a. Remove the 3 bolts and parking lock pawl bracket.
14. REMOVE PARKING LOCK ROD SUB-ASSEMBLY

a. Disconnect the parking lock rod from the manual valve lever.
15. REMOVE PARKING LOCK PAWL SHAFT

a. Pull out the parking lock pawl shaft from the front side, then
remove the lock pawl and spring.
b. Remove the E-ring from the shaft.
16. REMOVE MANUAL VALVE LEVER SUB-ASSEMBLY

a. Using a screwdriver and hammer, cut off the spacer and remove it
from the shaft.
b. Using a pin punch and hammer, tap out the spring pin.
Tech Tips
Slowly tap out the spring pin so that it does not fall into the transmission
case.
c. Pull the manual valve lever shaft out through the case, and remove
the manual valve lever.
17. REMOVE MANUAL VALVE LEVER SHAFT OIL SEAL

a. Using a screwdriver, pry out the oil seal.
18. REMOVE OIL PUMP ASSEMBLY

a. Remove the 11 bolts from the transmission case.
b. Pull out the oil pump.

Note
Do not damage the oil pump.
c. Remove the O-ring from the oil pump.

19. REMOVE OVERDRIVE AND REVERSE MULTIPLE DISC CLUTCH ASSEMBLY AND FRONT PLANETARY GEAR ASSEMBLY WITH NO. 1 BRAKE
DISC SET
a. Remove the overdrive and reverse multiple disc clutch assembly
and front planetary gear with No. 1 brake disc set from the
transmission case.
b. Remove the thrust needle roller bearing and race.
20. REMOVE NO. 1 BRAKE DISC SET

a. Remove the 5 plates, 5 discs and flange.
21. INSPECT NO. 1 BRAKE DISC

a. Replace all discs if one of the following problems is present: 1) a
disc, plate or flange is worn or burnt; 2) the lining of a disc is
peeled off or discolored; or 3) grooves or printed numbers have
even a little bit of damage.
Note
Before assembling new discs, soak them in ATF for at least 2 hours.
22. REMOVE FRONT PLANETARY GEAR ASSEMBLY

a. Remove the front planetary gear with the front planetary sun gear
from the overdrive and reverse multiple disc clutch assembly.
b. Remove the 3 oil seal rings.
c. Remove the planetary carrier thrust washer.
d. Remove the 2 clutch drum oil seal rings.
e. Remove the front planetary sun gear.
23. INSPECT FRONT PLANETARY GEAR ASSEMBLY

a. Using a feeler gauge, measure the front planetary gear pinion
thrust clearance.
Standard clearance
0.2 to 0.6 mm (0.008 to 0.024 in.)
If the clearance is not as specified, replace the front planetary
gear assembly.
24. REMOVE NO. 3 CLUTCH DISC SET

a. Using a screwdriver, remove the hole snap ring from the overdrive
direct clutch drum.
b. Remove the flange, 4 discs and 4 plates from the drum.
25. INSPECT NO. 3 CLUTCH DISC

Note
26. REMOVE REVERSE CLUTCH DISC SET

a. Using a screwdriver, remove the hole snap ring from the No. 2
reverse clutch drum.
b. Remove the flange, 5 discs, 5 plates and cushion plate from the
drum.
27. INSPECT REVERSE CLUTCH DISC

Note
28. REMOVE REVERSE CLUTCH PISTON

a. Place SST on the reverse clutch balancer, and compress the return
spring with a press.
SST
09380-50010
b. Using SST, remove the snap ring.
SST
09350-30020 ( 09350-07070 )
c. Remove the reverse piston balancer and reverse clutch piston

return spring from the drum.
d. Hold the clutch piston and apply compressed air to the oil hole of
the drum to remove the clutch piston.
e. Remove the O-ring from the piston.
29. INSPECT REVERSE CLUTCH RETURN SPRING SUB-ASSEMBLY
a. Using a vernier caliper, measure the free length of the spring
together with the spring seat.
Standard free length
22.21 mm (0.8744 in.)
If the free length is shorter than the standard free length, replace
the reverse clutch return spring sub-assembly.
30. REMOVE REVERSE CLUTCH DRUM SUB-ASSEMBLY

a. Remove the reverse clutch drum from the overdrive direct clutch
drum.
Tech Tips
The reverse clutch drum is easier to remove if a hole snap ring is installed.
Use the hole snap ring from the "REMOVE REVERSE CLUTCH DISC SET"
procedure.
b. Remove the 3 O-rings from the reverse clutch drum.
31. REMOVE NO. 3 CLUTCH PISTON

SST
09380-50010
SST
09350-30020 ( 09350-07070 )
c. Remove the No. 3 clutch balancer and overdrive clutch return

spring sub-assembly.
d. Hold the clutch piston and apply compressed air to the oil hole of
e. Remove the O-ring from the balancer.
f. Remove the O-ring from the piston.
g. Remove the O-ring from the overdrive direct clutch drum sub-
assembly.
32. INSPECT OVERDRIVE CLUTCH RETURN SPRING SUB-ASSEMBLY

21.09 mm (0.8303 in.)
the forward clutch return spring sub-assembly.
33. INSPECT NO. 3 CLUTCH DRUM SUB-ASSEMBLY

a. Using a caliper gauge, measure the inside diameter of the overdrive
and reverse multiple disc clutch drum bush.
Standard inside diameter for front side
67.40 to 67.44 mm (2.6535 to 2.6551 in.)
Standard inside diameter for rear side
55.62 to 55.64 mm (2.1898 to 2.1905 in.)
If the inside diameter is not as specified, replace the overdrive and
reverse multiple disc clutch drum.
34. REMOVE FORWARD MULTIPLE DISC CLUTCH ASSEMBLY WITH FRONT PLANETARY RING GEAR
a. Remove the forward multiple disc clutch assembly with front
planetary ring gear, thrust needle roller bearing and race from the
transmission case.
b. Using needle-nose pliers, detach the snap ring and remove the ring
gear and snap ring from the forward multiple disc clutch assembly.
35. REMOVE FORWARD MULTIPLE CLUTCH DISC SET

a. Using a screwdriver, remove the snap ring.
b. Remove the flange, 6 discs, 6 plates and cushion plate.

36. INSPECT FORWARD MULTIPLE CLUTCH DISC
Note
37. REMOVE FORWARD CLUTCH PISTON

a. Place SST on the No. 1 clutch balancer, and compress the return
SST
09380-50010
SST
09350-30020 ( 09350-07070 )
c. Remove the No. 1 clutch balancer and forward clutch return spring
sub-assembly from the drum.
d. Remove the O-ring from the balancer.
e. Hold the clutch piston and apply compressed air to the oil hole of
f. Remove the 2 O-rings from the piston.
38. INSPECT FORWARD CLUTCH RETURN SPRING SUB-ASSEMBLY
20.82 mm (0.8197 in.)
39. INSPECT FORWARD CLUTCH DRUM SUB-ASSEMBLY

a. Using a caliper gauge, measure the inside diameter of the forward
clutch drum bush.
Standard inside diameter
33.200 to 33.225 mm (1.3071 to 1.3081 in.)
If the inside diameter is not as specified, replace the forward clutch
drum sub-assembly.
40. REMOVE MULTIPLE DISC CLUTCH HUB

a. Remove the clutch hub from the transmission case.
b. Remove the thrust bearing race and thrust needle roller bearing
from the transmission case.
41. REMOVE SUN GEAR INPUT DRUM SUB-ASSEMBLY
a. Remove the sun gear input drum, thrust needle roller bearing and
race from the transmission case.
42. INSPECT SUN GEAR INPUT DRUM SUB-ASSEMBLY

a. Using a caliper gauge, measure the inside diameter of the sun gear
input drum bush.
45.075 to 45.100 mm (1.7746 to 1.7756 in.)
If the inside diameter is not as specified, replace the sun gear input
drum sub-assembly.
43. REMOVE 1-WAY CLUTCH OUTER RACE WITH NO. 1 1-WAY CLUTCH
a. Using SST, remove the snap ring from the transmission case.
SST
09350-30020 ( 09350-07060 )
b. Remove the 1-way clutch outer race with 1-way clutch.
44. REMOVE REAR PLANETARY SUN GEAR ASSEMBLY

a. Remove the sun gear and thrust bearing race from the
transmission case.
45. INSPECT REAR PLANETARY SUN GEAR ASSEMBLY
a. Using a caliper gauge, measure the inside diameter of the rear
planetary sun gear bush.
28.700 to 28.721 mm (1.1299 to 1.1307 in.)
If the inside diameter is not as specified, replace the rear planetary
sun gear assembly.
46. REMOVE REAR PLANETARY GEAR ASSEMBLY

a. Remove the thrust needle roller bearing, rear planetary gear
assembly and thrust bearing races from the transmission case.
47. INSPECT NO. 1 1-WAY CLUTCH

a. Set the 1-way clutch to the rear planetary gear.
b. Hold the rear planetary gear assembly and turn the 1-way clutch.
c. Check that the 1-way clutch turns freely counterclockwise and
locks clockwise.
If there is a problem with the 1-way clutch, replace it.
48. REMOVE NO. 1 1-WAY CLUTCH

a. Remove the 2 snap rings from the outer race.
49. INSPECT REAR PLANETARY GEAR ASSEMBLY
a. Using a feeler gauge, measure the rear planetary gear pinion long
and short thrust clearance.
Standard clearance
0.2 to 0.6 mm (0.008 to 0.024 in.)
If the clearance is not as specified, replace the rear planetary gear
assembly.
b. Using a caliper gauge, measure the inside diameter of the rear

planetary gear bush.
71.60 to 71.63 mm (2.8189 to 2.8201 in.)
28.700 to 28.721 mm (1.1299 to 1.1307 in.)
gear assembly.
50. REMOVE NO. 2 BRAKE DISC SET

a. Remove the No. 1 plate, 4 discs, 3 No. 2 plates and flange.

Note
52. REMOVE DIRECT CLUTCH ASSEMBLY WITH REAR PLANETARY RING GEAR AND OUTPUT SHAFT SUB-ASSEMBLY
a. Remove the 2 thrust needle bearings, 2 races, direct clutch
assembly with rear planetary ring gear and output shaft from the
transmission case.
53. REMOVE REAR PLANETARY RING GEAR

a. Using needle-nose pliers, detach the snap ring and disconnect the
rear planetary ring gear from the output shaft.
54. DISCONNECT DIRECT CLUTCH ASSEMBLY

a. Disconnect the direct clutch drum from the output shaft and
remove the thrust needle bearing and thrust bearing race from the
output shaft.
b. Remove the 3 clutch drum oil seal rings from the output shaft.
c. Remove the 2 clutch drum oil seal rings from the direct clutch drum.
55. REMOVE NO. 2 CLUTCH DISC SET

a. Remove the snap ring and flange, 6 discs and 6 plates from the
direct clutch drum.

Note
57. REMOVE DIRECT CLUTCH PISTON

a. Place SST on the No. 2 clutch balancer, and compress the return
SST
09387-00020
SST
09350-30020 ( 09350-07070 )
c. Remove the No. 2 clutch balancer and direct clutch piston return
spring sub-assembly from the drum.
d. Remove the O-ring from the balancer.
e. Hold the clutch piston and apply compressed air to the oil hole of
the direct clutch drum to remove the clutch piston.
f. Remove the O-ring from the piston.
g. Remove the O-ring from the direct clutch drum.
58. INSPECT DIRECT CLUTCH RETURN SPRING SUB-ASSEMBLY

20.76 mm (0.8173 in.)
the direct clutch return spring sub-assembly.
59. REMOVE NO. 2 BRAKE PISTON

a. Set SST on the brake piston return spring, tighten SST and
compress the return spring.
SST
09380-50010
b. Using SST, remove the snap ring and the brake return spring.
SST
09350-30020 ( 09350-07070 )
c. Hold the brake piston and apply compressed air to the oil hole of
the transmission case to remove the brake piston.
d. Remove the 3 O-rings from the brake piston.
60. INSPECT 2ND BRAKE PISTON RETURN SPRING SUB-ASSEMBLY

23.36 mm (0.9197 in.)
the 2nd brake piston return spring sub-assembly.
61. REMOVE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION REAR OIL SEAL

a. Using SST, tap out the oil seal.
SST
09308-00010
62. REMOVE OUTPUT SHAFT REAR RADIAL BALL BEARING

a. Using snap ring pliers, remove the snap ring from the transmission case.
b. Using SST, remove the bearing.
SST
09308-00010
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION UNIT INSPECTION

Note
2. INSPECT FRONT PLANETARY GEAR ASSEMBLY

a. Using a feeler gauge, measure the front planetary gear pinion
thrust clearance.
Standard clearance
0.2 to 0.6 mm (0.008 to 0.024 in.)
If the clearance is not as specified, replace the front planetary
gear assembly.

Note
4. INSPECT REVERSE CLUTCH DISC

Note
5. INSPECT REVERSE CLUTCH RETURN SPRING SUB-ASSEMBLY

22.21 mm (0.8744 in.)
the reverse clutch return spring sub-assembly.
6. INSPECT OVERDRIVE CLUTCH RETURN SPRING SUB-ASSEMBLY

21.09 mm (0.8303 in.)
7. INSPECT NO. 3 CLUTCH DRUM SUB-ASSEMBLY

a. Using a caliper gauge, measure the inside diameter of the overdrive
and reverse multiple disc clutch drum bush.
67.40 to 67.44 mm (2.6535 to 2.6551 in.)
55.62 to 55.64 mm (2.1898 to 2.1905 in.)
If the inside diameter is not as specified, replace the overdrive and
reverse multiple disc clutch drum.
8. INSPECT FORWARD MULTIPLE CLUTCH DISC

Note
9. INSPECT FORWARD CLUTCH RETURN SPRING SUB-ASSEMBLY

20.82 mm (0.8197 in.)
10. INSPECT FORWARD CLUTCH DRUM SUB-ASSEMBLY
a. Using a caliper gauge, measure the inside diameter of the forward
clutch drum bush.
33.200 to 33.225 mm (1.3071 to 1.3081 in.)
If the inside diameter is not as specified, replace the forward clutch
drum sub-assembly.
11. INSPECT SUN GEAR INPUT DRUM SUB-ASSEMBLY

a. Using a caliper gauge, measure the inside diameter of the sun gear
input drum bush.
45.075 to 45.100 mm (1.7746 to 1.7756 in.)
If the inside diameter is not as specified, replace the sun gear input
drum sub-assembly.
12. INSPECT REAR PLANETARY SUN GEAR ASSEMBLY

a. Using a caliper gauge, measure the inside diameter of the rear
planetary sun gear bush.
28.700 to 28.721 mm (1.1299 to 1.1307 in.)
sun gear assembly.
13. INSPECT REAR PLANETARY GEAR ASSEMBLY

a. Using a feeler gauge, measure the rear planetary gear pinion long
and short thrust clearance.
Standard clearance
0.2 to 0.6 mm (0.008 to 0.024 in.)
If the clearance is not as specified, replace the rear planetary gear
assembly.
b. Using a caliper gauge, measure the inside diameter of the rear
planetary gear bush.
71.60 to 71.63 mm (2.8189 to 2.8201 in.)
28.700 to 28.721 mm (1.1299 to 1.1307 in.)
gear assembly.

locks clockwise.

Note

Note
17. INSPECT DIRECT CLUTCH RETURN SPRING SUB-ASSEMBLY
20.76 mm (0.8173 in.)
the direct clutch return spring sub-assembly.
18. INSPECT 2ND BRAKE PISTON RETURN SPRING SUB-ASSEMBLY

23.36 mm (0.9197 in.)
the 2nd brake piston return spring sub-assembly.
19. INSPECT AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CASE SUB-ASSEMBLY

a. Using a caliper gauge, measure the inside diameter of the
automatic transmission case sleeve bush.
49.07 to 49.155 mm (1.9319 to 1.9352 in.)
If the inside diameter is not as specified, replace the automatic
transmission case sub-assembly.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION UNIT REASSEMBLY
1. BEARING POSITION
Bearing Position
Front Race Thrust Bearing Rear Race
Position Diameter Diameter Diameter
Inside/Outside Inside/Outside Inside/Outside
36.2 mm (1.425 44.0 mm (1.732
A - in.) / 58.2 mm in.) / 62.0 mm
(2.291 in.) (2.441 in.)
34.5 mm (1.358 36.6 mm (1.441
B - in.) / 49.4 mm in.) / 51.9 mm
(1.945 in.) (2.043 in.)
46.5 mm (1.831 47.0 mm (1.850

C in.) / 60.1 mm in.) / 61.9 mm -
(2.366 in.) (2.437 in.)
71.9 mm (2.831 72.7 mm (2.858
D - in.) / 85.6 mm in.) / 89.2 mm
(3.370 in.) (3.512 in.)
30.0 mm (1.181 31.0 mm (1.221
E in.) / 49.9 mm in.) / 53.1 mm -
(1.965 in.) (2.091 in.)
31.5 mm (1.240 28.7 mm (1.130 28.7 mm (1.130
F in.) / 53.0 mm in.) / 52.3 mm in.) / 50.4 mm
(2.0866 in.) (2.059 in.) (1.984 in.)
30.5 mm (1.201 33.5 mm (1.319
G - in.) / 55.7 mm in.) / 59.0 mm
(2.189 in.) (2.323 in.)
58.9 mm (2.319 62.0 mm (2.441
H - in.) / 77.3 mm in.) / 82.5 mm
(3.043 in.) (3.248 in.)
2. INSTALL OUTPUT SHAFT REAR RADIAL BALL BEARING

a. Using SST, tap in the bearing to the transmission case.
SST
09316-60011 ( 09316-00011, 09316-00021 )
b. Using needle-nose pliers, install the snap ring.
3. INSTALL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION REAR OIL SEAL

a. Coat the lip of a new oil seal with MP grease.
b. Using SST and a hammer, tap in the oil seal until it fits with the
transmission case.
SST
09214-76011
Standard oil seal depth

3.5 +/-0.2 mm (0.138 +/-0.008 in.)
4. INSTALL NO. 2 BRAKE PISTON

a. Coat 3 new O-rings with ATF, and install them to the brake piston.
b. Install the brake piston to the transmission case.
Tech Tips
Make sure that the parking hole of the brake piston is on the bottom side
by engaging the brake piston's 2 protrusions to the transmission case's
spline grooves. (One groove is 3 places clockwise from the top, and the
other is 2 places clockwise from the bottom).
c. Install the brake return spring to the transmission case.
d. Set SST on the brake piston return spring, tighten SST and
compress the return spring.
SST
09380-50010
e. Using SST, install the snap ring.
SST
09350-30020 ( 09350-07070 )
5. SELECT NO. 2 BRAKE FLANGE

a. Measure length A (from the tip of the No. 2 brake piston to the
step in the transmission case) in the illustration. *1
Standard
14.77 to 15.37 mm (0.5815 to 0.6051 in.)
b. Assemble the 4 No. 2 brakes discs, 3 No. 2 brake plates, and No. 2
brake flange as shown in the illustration. Then with a weight fixture
of 500 g (17.64 oz) or less placed on the flange, measure length B.
*2
Standard
14.11 to 14.69 mm (0.5555 to 0.5783 in.)
c. Choose a No. 2 brake flange so that the value of measured length A
minus length B (from steps *1 and *2) is 0.52 to 0.82 mm (0.0204
to 0.0323 in.).
Flange thickness
Mark Thickness
0 1.95 to 2.05 mm (0.0768 to 0.0807 in.)
1 2.05 to 2.15 mm (0.0807 to 0.0846 in.)
2 2.15 to 2.25 mm (0.0846 to 0.0886 in.)
3 2.25 to 2.35 mm (0.0886 to 0.0925 in.)
4 2.35 to 2.45 mm (0.0925 to 0.0965 in.)
5 2.45 to 2.55 mm (0.0965 to 0.1004 in.)
6 2.55 to 2.65 mm (0.1004 to 0.1043 in.)
7 2.65 to 2.75 mm (0.1043 to 0.1083 in.)
8 2.75 to 2.85 mm (0.1083 to 0.1122 in.)
6. INSTALL DIRECT CLUTCH PISTON

a. Coat a new O-ring with ATF, and install it to the rear clutch drum sub-assembly.
b. Coat a new O-ring with ATF, and install it to the clutch piston.
c. Install the clutch piston to the rear clutch drum sub-assembly.
d. Coat a new O-ring with ATF, and install it to the No. 2 clutch
balancer.
e. Install the direct clutch piston return spring sub-assembly and

balancer to the rear clutch drum sub-assembly.
f. Place SST on the clutch balancer and compress the return spring
with a press.
SST
09387-00020
g. Using SST, install the snap ring.
SST
09350-30020 ( 09350-07070 )
7. INSTALL NO. 2 CLUTCH DISC SET

a. Install the 6 plates, 6 discs and flange to the rear clutch drum.
Install in order
P- D- P- D- P- D- P- D- P- D- P- D- F
Tech Tips
P = Plate
D = Disc
F = Flange
Note
b. Temporarily install the snap ring.
c. Using a dial indicator, measure the moving distance (distance A) of

the clutch flange at both ends across the diameter while blowing
compressed air (196 kPa, 2.0 kgf*cm2, 28 psi) from the oil hole as
shown in the illustration. Then choose from the 9 flange thicknesses
in the table so that the measured value is within the standard
value.
Standard
0.90 to 1.20 mm (0.0354 to 0.0472 in.)
Flange thickness
Mark Thickness
40 3.95 to 4.05 mm (0.1555 to 0.1594 in.)
41 4.05 to 4.15 mm (0.1594 to 0.1634 in.)
42 4.15 to 4.25 mm (0.1634 to 0.1673 in.)
43 4.25 to 4.35 mm (0.1673 to 0.1713 in.)
44 4.35 to 4.45 mm (0.1713 to 0.1752 in.)
45 4.45 to 4.55 mm (0.1752 to 0.1791 in.)
46 4.55 to 4.65 mm (0.1791 to 0.1831 in.)
47 4.65 to 4.75 mm (0.1831 to 0.1870 in.)
48 4.75 to 4.85 mm (0.1870 to 0.1909 in.)
d. Temporarily remove the snap ring, attach the selected flange and restore the snap ring.
8. CONNECT DIRECT CLUTCH ASSEMBLY
a. Coat 2 new oil seal rings with ATF, and install them to the direct
clutch drum sub-assembly.
Note
Do not expand the ring ends excessively.
b. Coat 3 new oil seal rings with ATF, and install them to the output
shaft.
Note
c. Install the thrust needle roller bearing and thrust bearing race.
Standard bearing and race diameter
Item Inside Outside

Bearing 30.5 mm (1.201 in.) 55.7 mm (2.189 in.)
Race 33.5 mm (1.319 in.) 59.0 mm (2.323 in.)
Note
Use a small amount of MP grease to make the thrust bearing and thrust
bearing race stay securely in place.
d. Connect the direct clutch assembly to the output shaft.
9. INSTALL REAR PLANETARY RING GEAR
a. Install the snap ring to the groove of the output shaft.
b. Using needle-nose pliers, attach the snap ring to install the ring
gear to the output shaft.
10. INSTALL DIRECT CLUTCH ASSEMBLY WITH REAR PLANETARY RING GEAR AND OUTPUT SHAFT SUB-ASSEMBLY
a. Install the 2 thrust needle bearings, 2 thrust bearing races, direct
a. Install the 2 thrust needle bearings, 2 thrust bearing races, direct
clutch with rear planetary ring gear and output shaft to the
transmission case.
Item Inside Outside

Race A 62.0 mm (2.441 in.) 82.5 mm (3.248 in.)
Bearing A 58.9 mm (2.319 in.) 77.3 mm (3.043 in.)
Race B 28.7 mm (1.130 in.) 50.4 mm (1.984 in.)
Bearing B 28.7 mm (1.130 in.) 52.3 mm (2.059 in.)
Note
Use a small amount of MP grease to make the thrust bearing and thrust bearing race stay securely in place.
11. INSTALL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLANGE YOKE ASSEMBLY
a. Using SST, install a new oil seal to the automatic transmission flange
yoke.
SST
09950-60010 ( 09951-00410 )
09950-70010 ( 09951-07100 )
b. Install the rear cover sleeve and 2 output shaft rear bearing No. 1
spacers.
c. Install the automatic transmission flange yoke.
d. Set SST.
SST
09330-00021
09950-30012 ( 09955-03040 )
e. Using SST and a 30 mm socket wrench, temporarily install and
tighten a new nut.
Torque:
126 N*m { 1,285 kgf*cm, 93 ft.*lbf }
12. SELECT REAR COVER SLEEVE

a. Using a dial indicator, measure the output shaft end play. Then
choose from the 15 sleeve thicknesses in the table so that the
measured value is within the standard value.
Standard end play
0.21 to 0.36 mm (0.0083 to 0.0142 in.)
Sleeve thickness
Mark Thickness
02 1.725 to 1.775 (0.0679 to 0.0699 in.)
03 1.775 to 1.825 (0.0699 to 0.0719 in.)
04 1.825 to 1.875 (0.0719 to 0.0738 in.)
05 1.875 to 1.925 (0.0738 to 0.0758 in.)
06 1.925 to 1.975 (0.0758 to 0.0778 in.)
07 1.975 to 2.025 (0.0778 to 0.0797 in.)
08 2.025 to 2.025 (0.0778 to 0.0797 in.)
09 2.075 to 2.125 (0.0817 to 0.0837 in.)
10 2.125 to 2.175 (0.0837 to 0.0856 in.)
11 2.175 to 2.225 (0.0778 to 0.0797 in.)
12 2.225 to 2.275 (0.0876 to 0.0896 in.)
13 2.275 to 2.325 (0.0896 to 0.0915 in.)
14 2.325 to 2.375 (0.0915 to 0.0935 in.)
15 2.375 to 2.425 (0.0935 to 0.0955 in.)
16 2.425 to 2.475 (0.0955 to 0.0974 in.)
b. Temporarily remove the lock nut, flange yoke, 2 spacers and sleeve, attach the selected sleeve and restore the flange
yoke.
c. Using a chisel and hammer, securely stake the nut.
13. INSTALL REAR PLANETARY GEAR ASSEMBLY
a. Install the thrust bearing race, rear planetary gear assembly and
thrust needle roller bearing to the transmission case.
Item Inside Outside

Race 31.5 mm (1.240 in.) 53.0 mm (2.0866 in.)
Note
Before installing the rear planetary gear, apply ATF to rear
planetary gear bush's sliding surfaces. After the installation, check
that the rear planetary gear rotates smoothly.
14. INSTALL REAR PLANETARY SUN GEAR ASSEMBLY
a. Install the thrust bearing race and sun gear to the transmission
case.
Standard bearing race diameter
Item Inside Outside

Race 30.0 mm (1.181 in.) 49.9 mm (1.965 in.)
Note
Before installing the sun gear, apply ATF to sun gear bush's sliding
surfaces. After the installation, check that the sun gear rotates
smoothly.
Use a small amount of MP grease to make the thrust bearing race stay securely in place.
15. INSTALL NO. 2 BRAKE DISC SET
a. Install the selected flange, 4 discs, 3 No. 2 plates and No. 1 plate.
Install in order
F - D - No. 2 P - D - No. 2 P - D - No. 2 P - D - No. 1 P
Tech Tips
F = Flange
D = Disc
P = Plate
Tech Tips
Assemble the transmission case, flanges and plates by aligning their
grooves as shown in the illustration.
Note
16. INSTALL NO. 1 1-WAY CLUTCH
a. Install the 1-way clutch to the outer race with the 2 snap rings.
Note
Do not mistake the direction of the 1-way clutch.

locks clockwise.
18. INSTALL 1-WAY CLUTCH OUTER RACE WITH NO. 1 1-WAY CLUTCH
a. Install the 1-way clutch outer race with 1-way clutch to the
transmission case.
b. Using SST, install the snap ring to the transmission case.
SST
09350-30020 ( 09350-07060 )
Note
Install the snap ring so that its tapered face is facing the front side
of the transmission case.
Install the snap ring so that its gap end is within the range shown in
the illustration.
19. INSTALL SUN GEAR INPUT DRUM SUB-ASSEMBLY

a. Install the thrust bearing race, thrust needle roller bearing and sun
gear input drum.
Item Inside Outside

Race 72.7 mm (2.858 in.) 89.2 mm (3.512 in.)
Note
Before installing the sun gear input drum, apply ATF to sun gear
input drum bush's sliding surfaces. After the installation, check that
the sun gear input drum rotates smoothly.
20. INSTALL FORWARD CLUTCH PISTON
a. Coat 2 new O-rings with ATF, and install it to the clutch piston.
b. Install the clutch piston to the forward clutch drum.
c. Coat a new O-ring with ATF, and install it to the No. 1 clutch
balancer.
d. Install the forward clutch return spring sub-assembly and clutch

balancer to the forward clutch drum.
e. Place SST on the clutch balancer, and compress the clutch balancer
with a press.
SST
09380-50010
f. Using SST, install the snap ring.
SST
09350-30020 ( 09350-07070 )
Note
Be sure that the end gap of the snap ring is not aligned with the
spring retainer claw.
Stop pressing when the balancer is lowered to the place 1 to 2 mm
(0.039 to 0.078 in.) from the snap ring groove to prevent spring
sheet deformation.
Do not expand the snap ring excessively.
21. INSTALL FORWARD MULTIPLE CLUTCH DISC SET
a. Install the cushion plate, 4 plates, 4 discs and flange to the forward
clutch drum.
Install in order
C- P- D- P- D- P- D- P- D- F
Tech Tips
C = Cushion
P = Plate
D = Disc
F = Flange
Note
Assemble the cushion plate by facing its marked side towards the plates.
c. Temporarily assemble the front planetary gear assembly to the
forward clutch assembly.
d. Using a dial indicator, measure the moving distance (distance A) of
the clutch flange at both ends across the diameter while blowing
compressed air (196 kPa, 2.0 kgf*cm, 28 psi) from the oil hole as
shown in the illustration. Then choose from the 9 flange thicknesses
in the table so that the measured value is within the standard
value.
Standard
0.90 to 1.20 mm (0.0354 to 0.0472 in.)
Flange thickness
Mark Thickness
0 4.35 to 4.45 mm (0.1713 to 0.1752 in.)
1 4.45 to 4.55 mm (0.1752 to 0.1791 in.)
2 4.55 to 4.65 mm (0.1791 to 0.1831 in.)
3 4.65 to 4.75 mm (0.1831 to 0.1870 in.)
4 4.75 to 4.85 mm (0.1870 to 0.1909 in.)
5 4.85 to 4.95 mm (0.1909 to 0.1949 in.)
6 4.95 to 5.05 mm (0.1949 to 0.1988 in.)
7 5.05 to 5.15 mm (0.1988 to 0.2029 in.)
8 5.15 to 5.25 mm (0.2029 to 0.2067 in.)
e. Temporarily remove the snap ring, attach the selected flange and restore the snap ring.
f. Remove the front planetary gear assembly.
22. INSTALL FRONT PLANETARY RING GEAR
a. Install the snap ring to the groove of forward clutch drum.
b. Using needle-nose pliers, attach the snap ring to install the ring
gear to the forward multiple disc clutch assembly.
Note
Check that the snap ring is securely fit into the groove by looking through
the ring gear slots on both sides.
23. INSTALL MULTIPLE DISC CLUTCH HUB

a. Install the thrust needle bearing, thrust bearing race and multiple
disc clutch hub to the forward clutch assembly.
Item Inside Outside

Race 36.6 mm (1.441 in.) 51.9 mm (2.043 in.)
Note
Use a small amount of MP grease to make the thrust bearing and thrust
bearing race stay securely in place.
24. INSTALL FORWARD CLUTCH ASSEMBLY WITH FRONT PLANETARY RING GEAR AND MULTIPLE DISC CLUTCH HUB
a. Install the thrust bearing race, thrust needle bearing and forward
clutch assembly with front planetary ring gear and multiple disc
clutch hub to the transmission case.
Item Inside Outside

Race 46.5 mm (1.831 in.) 60.1 mm (2.366 in.)
Note
Before installing the forward clutch drum, apply ATF to forward
clutch drum bush's sliding surfaces. After the installation, check that the forward clutch drum rotates smoothly.
25. INSTALL NO. 3 CLUTCH PISTON
a. Coat a new O-ring with ATF, and install it to the overdrive direct clutch drum sub-assembly.
b. Coat a new O-ring with ATF, and install it to the piston.
c. Install the piston to the direct clutch drum.
d. Coat a new O-ring with ATF, and install it to the No. 3 clutch
balancer.
e. Install the overdrive clutch return spring and balancer to the direct
clutch drum.
f. Place SST on the clutch balancer, and compress the clutch balancer
with a press.
SST
09380-50010
g. Using SST, install the snap ring.
SST
09350-30020 ( 09350-07070 )
Note
sheet deformation.
26. INSTALL REVERSE CLUTCH DRUM SUB-ASSEMBLY
a. Coat 3 new O-rings with ATF, and install them to the drum.
b. Install the drum to the overdrive direct clutch drum sub-assembly.
27. INSTALL REVERSE CLUTCH PISTON

a. Coat a new O-ring with ATF, and install it to the piston.
b. Install the piston, reverse clutch piston return spring and reverse
clutch balancer.
c. Place SST on the clutch balancer, and compress the clutch balancer
with a press.
SST
09380-50010
d. Using SST, install the snap ring.
SST
09350-30020 ( 09350-07070 )
Note
sheet deformation.
28. INSTALL REVERSE CLUTCH DISC SET
a. Install the cushion plate, 5 plates, 5 discs and flange to the No. 2
reverse clutch drum.
Install in order
C- P- D- P- D- P- D- P- D- P- D- F
Tech Tips
C = Cushion Plate
P = Plate
D = Disc
F = Flange
Note
Assemble the cushion plate by facing its marked side towards the
plates.
c. Place the oil pump onto the torque converter clutch, and then place the clutch drum and input shaft onto the oil pump.
d. Using a dial indicator, measure the moving distance (distance A) of the clutch flange at both ends across the diameter
while blowing compressed air (196 kPa, 2.0 kgf*cm2, 28 psi) from the oil hole as shown in the illustration. Then choose from
the 9 flange thicknesses in the table so that the measured value is within the standard value.
Standard
0.75 to 1.05 mm (0.0295 to 0.0354 in.)
Flange thickness
Mark Thickness
0 2.95 to 3.05 mm (0.1161 to 0.1201 in.)
1 3.05 to 3.15 mm (0.1201 to 0.1240 in.)
2 3.15 to 3.25 mm (0.1240 to 0.1280 in.)
3 3.25 to 3.35 mm (0.1280 to 0.1319 in.)
4 3.35 to 3.45 mm (0.1319 to 0.1358 in.)
5 3.45 to 3.55 mm (0.1358 to 0.1398 in.)
6 3.55 to 3.65 mm (0.1398 to 0.1437 in.)
7 3.65 to 3.75 mm (0.1437 to 0.1476 in.)
8 3.75 to 3.85 mm (0.1476 to 0.1516 in.)
e. Temporarily remove the snap ring, attach the selected flange and restore the snap ring.
29. INSTALL NO. 3 CLUTCH DISC SET
a. Install the 4 plates, 4 discs and flange to the overdrive direct
clutch drum.
Install in order
P- D- P- D- P- D- P- D- F
Tech Tips
P = Plate
D = Disc
F = Flange
Note
c. Using a dial indicator, measure the moving distance (distance A) of the clutch flange at both ends across the diameter
while blowing compressed air (196 kPa, 2.0 kgf*cm2, 28 psi) from the oil hole as shown in the illustration. Then choose from
the 7 flange thicknesses in the table so that the measured value is within the standard value.
Standard
0.6 to 0.9 mm (0.0236 to 0.0354 in.)
Flange thickness
Mark Thickness
0 3.95 to 4.05 mm (0.1555 to 0.1594 in.)
1 4.05 to 4.15 mm (0.1594 to 0.1634 in.)
2 4.15 to 4.25 mm (0.1634 to 0.1673 in.)
3 4.25 to 4.35 mm (0.1673 to 0.1713 in.)
4 4.35 to 4.45 mm (0.1713 to 0.1752 in.)
5 4.45 to 4.55 mm (0.1752 to 0.1791 in.)
6 4.55 to 4.65 mm (0.1791 to 0.1831 in.)
d. Temporarily remove the snap ring, attach the selected flange and restore the snap ring.
30. INSTALL FRONT PLANETARY GEAR ASSEMBLY
a. Install the front planetary sun gear.
b. Coat 2 new oil seal rings with ATF, and install them to the planetary
gear.
Note
c. Coat 3 new oil seal rings with ATF, and install them to the planetary
gear.
Note
d. Install the planetary carrier thrust washer to the planetary gear.

Note
Use a small amount of MP grease to make the thrust washer stay securely
in place.
e. Assemble the front planetary gear assembly with the front

planetary sun gear to the overdrive and reverse multiple disc
clutch assembly.
31. SELECT NO. 1 BRAKE FLANGE

a. Measure length A (from the step of the oil pump installation
surface of the transmission case to the step of the No. 1 brake
flange installation surface) in the illustration. *1
Standard
59.77 to 60.03 mm (2.3531 to 2.3634 in.)
b. Measure length B (from the flange face of the oil pump assembly to
the tip of the No. 1 brake piston) in the illustration. *2
Standard
34.636 to 34.964 mm (1.3636 to 1.3765 in.)
c. Assemble the 5 brake plates, 5 brake discs, and brake flange, and
measure length C in the illustration. *3
Standard
23.84 to 24.36 mm (0.9386 to 0.9591 in.)
d. Choose a No. 1 brake flange so that the value of measured length A
minus lengths B and C (from steps *1, *2, *3) is 0.75 to 1.05 mm
(0.0295 to 0.0413 in.).
Flange thickness
Mark Thickness
0 4.45 to 4.55 mm (0.1752 to 0.1791 in.)
1 4.55 to 4.65 mm (0.1791 to 0.1831 in.)
2 4.65 to 4.75 mm (0.1831 to 0.1870 in.)
3 4.75 to 4.85 mm (0.1870 to 0.1909 in.)
4 4.85 to 4.95 mm (0.1909 to 0.1949 in.)
5 4.95 to 5.05 mm (0.1949 to 0.1988 in.)
6 5.05 to 5.15 mm (0.1988 to 0.2028 in.)
7 5.15 to 5.25 mm (0.2028 to 0.2067 in.)

8 5.25 to 5.35 mm (0.2067 to 0.2106 in.)
32. INSTALL OVERDRIVE AND REVERSE MULTIPLE DISC CLUTCH ASSEMBLY WITH FRONT PLANETARY GEAR ASSEMBLY
a. Install the thrust bearing race, thrust needle bearing, overdrive
and reverse multiple disc clutch assembly with front planetary gear
assembly to the transmission case.
Item Inside Outside

Race 44.0 mm (1.732 in.) 62.0 mm (2.441 in.)
Note
Before installing the overdrive and reverse multiple clutch, apply
ATF to the No. 3 clutch drum bush's sliding surfaces. After the installation, check that the No. 3 clutch drum rotates smoothly.
33. INSTALL NO. 1 BRAKE DISC SET
a. Install the selected flange, 5 discs and 5 plates to the transmission
case.
Install in order
F- D- P - D- P - D- P - D- P - D- P
Tech Tips
F = Flange
D = Disc
P = Plate
Note
34. INSTALL OIL PUMP ASSEMBLY
a. Coat a new O-ring with ATF, and install it to the oil pump.
b. Place the oil pump through the input shaft, and align the bolt holes
of the oil pump with the transmission case.
c. Hold the input shaft, and lightly press the oil pump body to slide the
oil seal rings into the No. 3 clutch drum.
d. Install the 11 bolts.

Torque:
21 N*m { 214 kgf*cm, 15 ft.*lbf }
Note
Make sure to apply seal packing to the flanges of the bolts.
Seal packing
Toyota Genuine Seal Packing 1281,
Three Bond 1281 or equivalent
Do not allow seal packing to contact the bolts' threads.
During installation, do not allow oil to contact the bolts or the
surface of the oil pump body.
35. INSPECT INDIVIDUAL PISTON OPERATION
a. Check the operating sound while applying compressed air into the
oil holes indicated in the illustration.
Tech Tips
C1 = Forward multiple clutch
C2 = No. 2 clutch
C3 = No. 3 clutch
C4 = Reverse clutch
B1 = No. 1 brake
B2 = No. 2 brake
36. INSTALL MANUAL VALVE LEVER SHAFT OIL SEAL
SST
09350-30020 ( 09350-07110 )
Standard depth
0 +/-0.3 mm (0 +/-0.012 in.)
b. Coat the lip of the oil seal with MP grease.
37. INSTALL MANUAL VALVE LEVER SUB-ASSEMBLY

a. Install a new spacer to the manual valve lever.
b. Install the manual valve lever shaft to the transmission case
through the manual valve lever.
c. Using a hammer, tap in a new spring pin.
d. Align the manual valve lever indentation with the spacer hole, and
stake them together with a punch.
e. Make sure that the shaft rotates smoothly.
38. INSTALL PARKING LOCK PAWL SHAFT

a. Install the E-ring to the shaft.
b. Install the parking lock pawl, shaft and spring.
39. INSTALL PARKING LOCK ROD SUB-ASSEMBLY

a. Connect the parking lock rod to the manual valve lever.
40. INSTALL PARKING LOCK PAWL BRACKET

a. Place the parking lock pawl bracket onto the transmission case.
Loosely install the 3 bolts, and then tighten them in the order
Torque:
18 N*m { 184 kgf*cm, 13 ft.*lbf }
b. Shift the manual valve lever to the P position, and confirm that the
output shaft is correctly locked up by the lock pawl.
41. INSTALL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CASE PLUG
a. Coat a new O-ring with ATF, and install it to the case plug.
b. Install the case plug to the transmission case.
Torque:
80 N*m { 816 kgf*cm, 59 ft.*lbf }
42. INSTALL SPEED SENSOR

a. Coat a new O-ring with ATF and install it to the speed sensor NT .
b. Using a T30 ''TORX'' wrench, install the sensor NT with the bolt.
Torque:
6.8 N*m { 69 kgf*cm, 60 in.*lbf }
c. Install the speed sensor SP2 and NC3 with the 2 bolts.
Torque:
5.4 N*m { 55 kgf*cm, 48 in.*lbf }

connector.
Torque:
5.4 N*m { 55 kgf*cm, 48 in.*lbf }
d. Coat a new O-ring with ATF and install it to the speed sensor NT.
44. INSTALL CHECK BALL BODY

a. Align the groove of the manual valve lever with the pin of the
manual valve and install the pin.
b. Install the 17 bolts.

Torque:
11 N*m { 112 kgf*cm, 8 ft.*lbf }
Tech Tips
Bolt length
c. Install the detent spring and detent cover with the bolt.
Torque:
10 N*m { 102 kgf*cm, 7 ft.*lbf }
Note
d. Connect the 8 connectors to the solenoid valves.

e. Coat a new O-ring with ATF and install it to the ATF temperature
sensor.
f. Install the ATF temperature sensor and lock plate with the bolt.
Torque:
10 N*m { 102 kgf*cm, 7 ft.*lbf }

Note
Torque:
11 N*m { 112 kgf*cm, 8 ft.*lbf }

the 9 bolts.
Torque:
7.3 N*m { 74 kgf*cm, 64 in.*lbf }
Note
the oil pan.
48. INSTALL NO. 1 BREATHER PLUG
49. INSTALL OIL COOLER TUBE UNION

a. Coat 2 new O-rings with ATF, and install them to the unions.
b. Install the unions as shown in the illustration.
Torque:
29 N*m { 296 kgf*cm, 21 ft.*lbf }
50. INSTALL PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSEMBLY
Tech Tips
Make sure that the manual valve lever shaft has not been rotated prior to installing the park/neutral position switch as the detent spring may
become detached from the manual valve lever shaft.
a. Install the park/neutral position switch onto the manual valve lever
shaft, and temporarily install the bolt.
b. Install a new lock washer with the nut.
Torque:
6.9 N*m { 70 kgf*cm, 61 in.*lbf }
c. Temporarily install the control shaft lever.
d. Turn the control shaft lever counterclockwise until it stops, and

turn it clockwise 2 notches to set it to the N position.
e. Remove the control shaft lever.
f. Align the groove with the neutral basic line.

Torque:
13 N*m { 133 kgf*cm, 10 ft.*lbf }
g. Hold the switch in this position and tighten the bolt.
Torque:
13 N*m { 133 kgf*cm, 10 ft.*lbf }
h. Using a screwdriver, bend the tabs of the lock washer.
Tech Tips
Bend at least 2 washer tabs.

a. Install the transmission control shaft lever with the nut.
Torque:
16 N*m { 163 kgf*cm, 12 ft.*lbf }
OIL PUMP COMPONENTS
ILLUSTRATION
OIL PUMP DISASSEMBLY
1. REMOVE OIL PUMP O-RING

a. Remove the O-ring from the oil pump.
2. FIX OIL PUMP ASSEMBLY

a. Place the oil pump body on the torque converter clutch.
3. REMOVE CLUTCH DRUM OIL SEAL RING

a. Remove the 4 oil seal rings.
4. REMOVE NO. 1 BRAKE PISTON

a. Using a T30 ''TORX'' wrench, remove the 5 bolts, brake piston
return spring sub-assembly and No. 1 brake piston.
b. Remove the 2 O-rings from the No. 1 brake piston.
5. REMOVE STATOR SHAFT CLUTCH DRUM THRUST WASHER
6. INSPECT NO. 1 BRAKE PISTON RETURN SPRING SUB-ASSEMBLY

a. Using a vernier caliper and straightedge, measure the distance
between the spring end and the straightedge.
Standard thickness
6.52 mm (0.2567 in.)
7. REMOVE STATOR SHAFT ASSEMBLY

a. Remove the 2 bolts and stator shaft from the oil pump body.
8. REMOVE FRONT OIL PUMP BODY O-RING
a. Remove the oil pump body from the torque converter clutch.
b. Remove the O-ring from the oil pump body.
9. INSPECT STATOR SHAFT ASSEMBLY

a. Using a caliper gauge, measure the inside diameter of the stator
shaft bush.
Maximum inside diameter
Front side
25.925 mm (1.0209 in.)
Rear side
35.251 mm (1.3878 in.)
If the inside diameter is greater than the maximum, replace the
stator shaft assembly.
10. INSPECT FRONT OIL PUMP BODY SUB-ASSEMBLY

a. Using a caliper gauge, measure the inside diameter of the oil pump
body bush.
45.078 mm (1.7747 in.)
If the inside diameter is greater than the maximum, replace the oil
pump body sub-assembly.
11. INSPECT CLEARANCE OF OIL PUMP ASSEMBLY

a. Push the driven gear to one side of the pump body.
b. Using a feeler gauge, measure the clearance between the driven
gear and pump body.
Standard body clearance
0.10 to 0.17 mm (0.0039 to 0.0067 in.)
If the body clearance is not as specified, replace the drive gear,
driven gear and pump body.
c. Using a feeler gauge, measure the clearance between the driven

gear teeth and drive gear teeth.
Standard tip clearance
0.07 to 0.15 mm (0.0028 to 0.0059 in.)
If the tip clearance is not as specified, replace the drive gear,
d. Using a steel straightedge and feeler gauge, measure the clearance
between both gears and straightedge.
Standard side clearance
0.03 to 0.05 mm (0.0012 to 0.002 in.)
If the side clearance is not as specified, replace the drive gear,
Tech Tips
There are 7 different thicknesses for the drive and driven gears.
Standard drive and driven gears thickness
Mark Thickness
0 11.636 to 11.642 mm (0.4581 to 0.4583 in.)
1 11.643 to 11.649 mm (0.4584 to 0.4586 in.)
2 11.650 to 11.656 mm (0.4587 to 0.4589 in.)
3 11.657 to 11.663 mm (0.4589 to 0.4592 in.)
4 11.664 to 11.670 mm (0.4592 to 0.4594 in.)
5 11.671 to 11.677 mm (0.4595 to 0.4597 in.)
6 11.678 to 11.684 mm (0.4598 to 0.4600 in.)
12. REMOVE FRONT OIL PUMP DRIVE GEAR

a. Remove the drive gear.
13. REMOVE FRONT OIL PUMP DRIVEN GEAR

a. Remove the driven gear.
14. REMOVE FRONT OIL PUMP OIL SEAL

a. Using a screwdriver, pry out the oil seal.
Note
Do not damage the bushing and oil pump body.
OIL PUMP REASSEMBLY
1. INSTALL OIL PUMP FRONT OIL SEAL

SST
09350-30020 ( 09351-32140 )
Standard depth
0 +/-0.2 mm (0.008 in.)
Tech Tips
The oil seal end should be flush with the outer edge of the pump body.
b. Coat the lip of the oil seal with MP grease.
2. FIX FRONT OIL PUMP BODY SUB-ASSEMBLY

a. Place the oil pump body on the torque converter clutch.
3. INSTALL FRONT OIL PUMP DRIVEN GEAR
a. Coat the driven gear with ATF.
b. Install the driven gear to the oil pump body.
4. INSTALL FRONT OIL PUMP DRIVE GEAR

a. Coat the drive gear with ATF.
b. Install the drive gear to the oil pump body.
5. INSTALL FRONT OIL PUMP BODY O-RING

a. Coat a new O-ring with ATF.
b. Install the O-ring to the oil pump body.
6. INSTALL STATOR SHAFT ASSEMBLY
a. Align the stator shaft with each bolt hole and install it.
b. Install the 2 bolts.
Torque:
11 N*m { 112 kgf*cm, 8 ft.*lbf }
7. INSTALL STATOR SHAFT CLUTCH DRUM THRUST WASHER

a. Align the 2 claws and install the thrust washer.
8. INSTALL NO. 1 BRAKE PISTON

a. Coat 2 new O-rings with ATF and install them to the No. 1 brake
piston.
b. Install the No. 1 brake piston and brake piston return spring sub-
assembly.
c. Using a T30 ''TORX'' wrench, install the 5 bolts.
Torque:
11 N*m { 112 kgf*cm, 8 ft.*lbf }
9. INSPECT OIL PUMP DRIVE GEAR ROTATION
a. Place the oil pump assembly on the torque converter clutch.
b. Make sure that the drive gear rotates smoothly.
10. INSTALL CLUTCH DRUM OIL SEAL RING

a. Coat 4 new oil seal rings with ATF.
b. Squeeze the ends of the 4 oil seal rings so that the gap becomes 8
mm (0.32 in.) or less, and then install them to the stator shaft
groove.
Note
Tech Tips
After installing the oil seal rings, check that they rotate smoothly.
11. INSTALL OIL PUMP O-RING

a. Install a new O-ring to the oil pump.
OIL PUMP INSPECTION
1. INSPECT NO. 1 BRAKE PISTON RETURN SPRING SUB-ASSEMBLY

a. Using a vernier caliper and straightedge, measure the distance
between the spring end and the straightedge.
Standard thickness
6.52 mm (0.2567 in.)
2. INSPECT FRONT OIL PUMP BODY SUB-ASSEMBLY

a. Using a caliper gauge, measure the inside diameter of the oil pump
body bush.
45.078 mm (1.7747 in.)
If the inside diameter is greater than the maximum, replace the oil
pump body sub-assembly.
3. INSPECT STATOR SHAFT ASSEMBLY

a. Using a caliper gauge, measure the inside diameter of the stator
shaft bush.
Front side
25.925 mm (1.0209 in.)
Rear side
35.251 mm (1.3878 in.)
If the inside diameter is greater than the maximum, replace the
stator shaft assembly.
4. INSPECT CLEARANCE OF OIL PUMP ASSEMBLY

a. Push the driven gear to one side of the pump body.
b. Using a feeler gauge, measure the clearance between the driven
gear and pump body.
Standard body clearance
0.10 to 0.17 mm (0.0039 to 0.0067 in.)
If the body clearance is not as specified, replace the drive gear,
c. Using a feeler gauge, measure the clearance between the driven

gear teeth and drive gear teeth.
Standard tip clearance
0.07 to 0.15 mm (0.0028 to 0.0059 in.)
If the tip clearance is not as specified, replace the drive gear,
d. Using a steel straightedge and feeler gauge, measure the clearance

between both gears and straightedge.
Standard side clearance
0.03 to 0.05 mm (0.0012 to 0.002 in.)
If the side clearance is not as specified, replace the drive gear,
Tech Tips
There are 7 different thicknesses for the drive and driven gears.
Standard drive and driven gears thickness
Mark Thickness
0 11.636 to 11.642 mm (0.4581 to 0.4583 in.)
1 11.643 to 11.649 mm (0.4584 to 0.4586 in.)
2 11.650 to 11.656 mm (0.4587 to 0.4589 in.)
3 11.657 to 11.663 mm (0.4589 to 0.4592 in.)
4 11.664 to 11.670 mm (0.4592 to 0.4594 in.)
5 11.671 to 11.677 mm (0.4595 to 0.4597 in.)
6 11.678 to 11.684 mm (0.4598 to 0.4600 in.)
5. INSPECT OIL PUMP DRIVE GEAR ROTATION

a. Place the oil pump assembly on the torque converter clutch.
b. Make sure that the drive gear rotates smoothly.

Aa80e Eng

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Aa80e Eng

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Aa80e Eng

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PARK / NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH REMOVAL

1. DISCONNECT FLOOR SHIFT GEAR SHIFTING ROD SUB-ASSEMBLY

2. REMOVE PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSEMBLY

c. Using a screwdriver, pry off the lock washer.

d. Remove the lock nut and lock washer.

e. Remove the bolt and park/neutral position switch.

1. ADJUST PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSEMBLY

1. INSPECT PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSEMBLY

Tester Connection Shift Lever Position Specified Condition

1. INSTALL PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSEMBLY

g. Align the groove with the neutral basic line.

2. CONNECT FLOOR SHIFT GEAR SHIFTING ROD SUB-ASSEMBLY

1. INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE (ATF TEMPERATURE SENSOR)

Tester Connection ATF Temperature Specified Condition

1. REMOVE COWL TOP VENTILATOR LOUVER

2. DISCONNECT CABLE FROM NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL

5. REMOVE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OIL PAN SUB-ASSEMBLY

c. Examine the particles in the pan.

6. REMOVE VALVE BODY OIL STRAINER ASSEMBLY

b. Remove the O-ring from the oil strainer.

7. REMOVE TRANSMISSION VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY

e. Remove the bolt, detent spring cover and detent spring.

h. Remove the check ball body and spring.

8. REMOVE TRANSMISSION WIRE

b. Disconnect the wire connector.

c. Remove the bolt and pull out the transmission wire.

1. INSTALL TRANSMISSION WIRE

d. Connect the wire connector.

e. Connect the 3 speed sensor connectors.

2. INSTALL TRANSMISSION VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY

e. Connect the 8 connectors to the solenoid valves.

3. INSTALL VALVE BODY OIL STRAINER ASSEMBLY

4. INSTALL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OIL PAN SUB-ASSEMBLY

5. INSTALL NO. 1 EXHAUST PIPE SUPPORT BRACKET SUB-ASSEMBLY

6. CONNECT CABLE TO NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL

7. INSTALL COWL TOP VENTILATOR LOUVER

8. ADD AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID

1. INSTALL TRANSMISSION WIRE

d. Connect the wire connector.

e. Connect the 3 speed sensor connectors.

2. INSTALL TRANSMISSION VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY

e. Connect the 8 connectors to the solenoid valves.

3. INSTALL VALVE BODY OIL STRAINER ASSEMBLY

4. INSTALL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OIL PAN SUB-ASSEMBLY

5. INSTALL NO. 1 EXHAUST PIPE SUPPORT BRACKET SUB-ASSEMBLY

6. CONNECT CABLE TO NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL

7. INSTALL COWL TOP VENTILATOR LOUVER

8. ADD AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID

1. INSTALL TRANSMISSION WIRE

d. Connect the wire connector.

e. Connect the 3 speed sensor connectors.

2. INSTALL TRANSMISSION VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY

e. Connect the 8 connectors to the solenoid valves.

3. INSTALL VALVE BODY OIL STRAINER ASSEMBLY

4. INSTALL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OIL PAN SUB-ASSEMBLY

5. INSTALL NO. 1 EXHAUST PIPE SUPPORT BRACKET SUB-ASSEMBLY

6. CONNECT CABLE TO NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL

7. INSTALL COWL TOP VENTILATOR LOUVER

8. ADD AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID